Samra Phase IV Add-on Combined Cycle Project

Operation and maintenance manual of hogging vacuum

pump

运行真空泵运行维护手册

佶缔纳士机械有限公司

Gardner Denver Nash Machinery Ltd.

Date： 2017.07.24
 Content of O&M Manual
1 Instructions….说明
1.1 General safety instructions….整体安全指南
1.2 User instructions ……… 用户说明
1.3 Technical Data … 技术数据
2 Description of system….系统描述
3 Operating Instruction…. 操作指南
3.1 Installation 安装
3.2 Prepairation for start up 试运行
4 Maintenance Instructions….维护指南
4.1 Maintenance, Clearances……… 维护，故障排除
4.2 Consumbles…………消耗品
5 Operation and maintenance of bare vacuum pump 泵头运行维护指南
6 Purchased Parts…… 外购件
7 Drawings, Lists, Diagrams, etc… 图纸，清册，图表
7.1 General arrangement drawing… 总装图
7.2 P&ID drawing…… 流程图
7.3 Foundation drawing……基础图
7.4 Terminal wiring diagram……接线端子图
7.5 Logic drawing…… 运行逻辑图
7.6 DCS IO list……DCS IO 清单
7.7 Instrument list…… 仪表清单
 1. Instructions 说明

1.1 General safety instructions 整体安全指南

The machines are under running including dangerous voltage, when any improperly using, the
machines may cause serious personal injury or material damage.
Particular note must be taken of the following:
ο Only qualified personnel are entrusted to work on the machines.
ο The machines must be power off, and properly grounded, before maintenance.

ο Only permitted parts can be used, during repairing work.

ο Must obey the regulations for maintenance period and for replacing parts.

该设备运行中存在危险电压，任何错误操作都可能导致人身伤亡及财产损失。
必须严格遵守本章及产品标签上有关说明。

ο 必须由有资格人员进行维修维护。

ο 维修维护前必须切断设备电源并接地。

ο 维修过程中只能用被批准认可的零部件。

ο 要严格遵守有关检修的周期及更换零部件的规定。

1.2 User instructions 用户说明

The purpose of this 2BW5 400 vacuum pump is to evacuate the air in the condenser, together with
the holding vacuum pump, before the turbine start up.
Before starting up the vacuum pump, all operators must read the operating manual carefully. Any
loss because of ignoring the instructions, is not due to us.
In guarantee period, all repairing work must be done, or permitted by us. If there is some difference
between real working condition and the order specification, please contact with us, otherwise the original
guarantee is invalid.
2BW5 400 真空泵的目的是在汽轮机启动前，与运行泵一起，抽空凝汽器内的空气。
该真空泵交付使用前，操作人员必须仔细阅读操作说明书。任何因未仔细阅读说明
书而引起的损失及损害我们概不负责。
 保修期内的维修及更换必须由我们的机械师同意才能进行。若实际工况及运行数据
与下订单时的数据有差异，请与我们联系，否则原有保证无效。

1.3 Technical Data 技术数据

GENERAL 概述
MODEL NO.型号 2BW5 400
NO. OF STAGE 级数 1
PUMP RATED SPEED 泵额定转速 417 r/min
PERFORMANCE 性能
CAPACITY IN DRY AIR AT SUCTION PRESSURE 4800m3/h
OF 34 Kpa(a) AND CW.TEMPERATURE 43 ℃
进口压力 34 Kpa(a),冷却水温 43 ℃的抽干空
气量
DISCHARGE PRESSURE 排气压力 atm
ACCESSORIES 附件
MAIN MOTOR 主电机
TYPE 型号 HJN1 315M-4
Votage/Ph/frequency 电压/相数/频率 400V/3Ph/50Hz
Rated Power 额定功率 132 kW
Rated Current 额定电流 229A
Ist/In 堵转电流/额定电流 8
 2 Description of system 系 统 描 述

General arrangement drawing G320311

Flow diagram (P&I D) G320312
Foundation and load drawing G320316
This vacuum pump package mainly includes: vacuum pump (010) , three-phase motor (030),
separator (080), base frame , and piping works.
Pressure switch (471) is used for opening the system inlet butterfly valve (161) under pre_setted
pressure.
When condenser connected, and inlet valve (161) opened, the air is evacuated from flange
connection N1.1, and through piping, into pump (010).
Non-return valve (163) is used for preventing the air and water from flowing back into the condenser,
when pump stopped by accident.
Air, with some pump operating liquid, is discharged from the pump (010) into the separator (080),
through the discharge piping. The air and the water is separated in the separator. The air is compressed
into atmosphere pressure, and discharged from flange connection N2.2.
Separator (080) is fitted with liquid level indicator (230), drain valve (241), and level switches (231L,
231N).
Through connection N3.3 and filling solenoid valve (221), fresh water is continually filled into the
pump.
The water level in the separator is indicated by level indicator (230). When the water level is higher
than the high level switch (230H), the centrifugal pump start, the water in the separator is drained. When
the water level is lower than the low level swith, the certrifugal pump stop.
Through drain valve (249), the pump (010) are drained.

外形图 G320311
流程图 G320312
基础图 G320316
该真空泵系统主要包括泵（010）和三相电机（030），分离器（080）,底盘，和管线。
 压力开关（012）的作用是在预先规定的压力下打开系统入口蝶阀（161）。
真空泵运行过程中，来自凝汽器中的空气通过管线，蝶阀 (161) 以及止回阀 (163)
被吸入真空泵（010）。
止回阀（163）用于防止泵突然停止时，空气返流回系统。
空气携带部分泵工作液，从泵通过排气管线排至分离器（080）。在分离器内，空气
与水分离。空气被压缩至大气压力， 通过法兰口 N2.2 排出系统。
分离器（080）配带磁浮子液位计（230）和液位开关（231L,231N)。
通过法兰接口 N3.3 和电磁阀（221），新鲜水补充至泵内。
分离器内液位由液位计（230）指示，液位开关控制离心泵（090）的动作，当分离
器内液位高于分离器高液位开关时，离心泵开启，将分离器内水排出，当水位低于分离
器上低液位开关时，离心泵停止。
 3 Operating Instruction 操 作 指 南

3.1 Installation 安装
The vacuum pump package is including all inner piping works and base frame showed in the
general arrangement drawing. The pump must be lifted by the 4 holes on the base frame, other hanging
points, such as the inner piping etc., are not permitted. Rapid moving is avoided during lifting and
launching.
The foundation shall be made of concrete or steel construction. For the load capacity, the unit
weight must be considered.
After installation, the bolts must be re-tightened.
After checking all the bolts in the right position and realignment, the bolts may be loosed, tightened
if necessary. No out tension from the piping connected with the pump is permitted, these piping works
must be properly supported or hanged.
For the vacuum pump, outside vibration and shock, such as that from the workshop, must be
removed.
When making installation and welding work around the pump, the pump must be protected. All
unconnected opens must be protected with caps, so as to prevent from outside contamination ( i.e. tools,
residual welding rod, welding residue, welding ball, dirt etc.) Especially when welding balls enter the
pump, parts in the pump shall be damaged.
Supply piping connected with the following flanges (see connection list for size) :
N1.1 Gas inlet of closed circuit vacuum pump
N2.2 Gas outlet of closed circuit vacuum pump
N3.3 Filling & replenishing of operating liquid
N4.0 Work liquid drainage
N4.2 Total drainage
Before connection, all piping areas in the site must be cleaned, or add starting filters at pump inlet
connection, during first few weeks.
Local management department’s stipulations must be observed, when making electrical wiring and
connection.
 该真空泵组配有如外形尺寸图所示的所有内部管线和底盘。只能通过底盘上的四个
吊装孔起吊设备，不允许通过内部管线或其它点起吊。提升和降落过程中，应避免急速
移动。
基础用混凝土或钢结构制作。其承载能力与机组重量相符。
机组安装好后，需重新调整并上紧螺栓。
在检查所有螺栓连接点是否准确安装到位及调整维修后，螺栓可能松动，如有必要，
将其上紧。同泵相连的管路不应施予真空泵张力及应力，这些管线应作始当支撑或悬吊
以防止将其载荷传递给水环真空泵。
外部颤动和震动，如从厂房传给真空泵的，应加防震板消除。
在泵周围进行安装，焊接等工作时，一定要对泵作适当保护。所有尚未连接的接口
都应加盖保护，以防外部污染物（如工具、残余焊条、焊渣、焊球、灰尘等）进入泵中。
因为这些物质在泵运转时可能破坏泵内零部件。
供排管线将与以下法兰连接（尺寸见接口表）：
N1.1 闭环真空泵气体入口
N2.2 闭环真空泵气体出口
N3.3 工作液供应、补充
N4.0 工作液排水
N4.2 总排空
连接以前，工厂安装现场各管段都应清理，或在开车运行的头几周内在泵入口设置
过滤器。
所有电气接线及接口都应遵守地方管理部门的有关规章。

3.2 Prepairation for start up 试运行

3.2.1 Preparation
Check and assure all installation for pump is right, according to flow diagram and general
arrangement drawing.
Before first start up, pump shaft must be turned by hand or other proper tools.
Check pump shaft rotary direction by switch on and off quickly, make sure that it is the same
direction as the arrow on the pump. Before this work, you must loose the stuffing gland, and tighten it
again.
 Discharge port (N2.2) must be opened completely, and also open the shut-off valves for pressure
gauge and pressure switch,and the valve after centrifugal pump(090) must open, and the pump and
separator drain valves must be closed.
Working liquid must be supplied to N3.3.
It’s very important that, clean the pump with clean water (soft water), before first start up, or
shutdown for more than 4 weeks after start up.
3.2.2 Filling the Pump
Assure the working liquid connected to N3.3.
3.2.3 Start up
When motor switched on, and system inlet valve opened, vacuum pump is running, and after water
ring established in the pump, the system turns into working condition.

3.2.4 Shut down

1.) Stop the driving motor of vacuum pump (010).
2.) Close inlet valve (161) to assure the needed starting condition.

Caution: For long time shutting down (1 month and/or longer), you must drain the pump.

3.2.1 准备
应根据流程图和尺寸图进行检查以保证管路和真空泵在整个布局中的安装是正确
的。
在第一次启动泵前，一定要用手或其他合适工具盘动泵轴。
泵轴旋转方向要通过点动电机进行检测，以保证与泵上所标箭头方向一致。进行此
工作前，应先稍微松动填料压盖，然后再紧住。
排气口（N2.2）必须全开，另外压力表和压力开关的截止阀也要打开，离心泵（090）
后的阀门也要打开，泵和分离器排水阀一定要关闭。
工作液一定要供至 N3.3 接口。
第一次试车前，开车后约 4 周及长时间停车后，真空泵应用洁净水（软水）进行清
洗， 这一点非常重要。
3.2.2 泵的注水
通过法兰接口 N3.3 向闭环真空系统内注入工作液.

3.2.3 启动

启动电机（030），打开系统进气阀, 真空泵即投入运行，当水环建立起来后，系统
进入工作状态。

3.2.4 停车
1）停真空泵（010）的驱动电机（030）。
2）关闭吸气入口阀门（161）以保证规定的启动状态。

注意：如果要长时间停车（1 个月或更长时间），则必需将泵内水排空。
 4 Maintenance Instruction 维 护 指 南

4.1 Maintenance, Clearances 维护，故障排除

4.1.1 At least once per month
1). Evenly running of vacuum pump (010) and motor (030), abnormal vibration and noise or increasing
bearing temperature means bad alignment of belts.
2). Condition of stuffing box of pump (010), some water flowing out of the stuffing box can assure enough
cooling. For detail, see vacuum pump operating instructions.
4.1.2 Once per year, annual maintenance
1). Drain the system, and clean it with clean water.
2). Check all valves, switches, gauge and other electric components, assure the normal working, and
proper function.
3). Check all filters, if necessary, clean them.

4.1.1 至少每月一次
1) 真空泵（010）和电机（030）的运转平稳性，超常的振动、噪音或轴承温度的升高
表明皮带的对中不好。
2). 泵（010）的填料压盖处的状况：少量的水从填料函溢出以保证有足够的冷却。
细节参阅真空泵的使用说明书。
4.1.2 每年一次，大修
1). 排净系统内液体，并用干净水冲洗。
2). 检查所有阀门、各控制阀、开关及仪表，确保功能正确。
3). 检查所有过滤器（如果有），清理干净。

4.2 Consumbles 消耗品

4.2.1 Lubricants information 润滑信息
Lubrication point 润 Lubricant type Additional frequency Additional amount
滑部位 润滑剂型号 补加频率 补加量

Bearing of drive end and

idle end of vacuum pump Gadus S2 V220 2 1 year About 80g
真空泵驱动端轴承和 佳度 S2 V220 2 1年 约 80g
非驱动端轴承

Bearing of drive end and

idle end of motor About 50g every
1 year
2#grease bearing
电机驱动端轴承和非 1年 每套轴承约 50g
驱动端轴承

4.2.2 packing 填料
The packing should be changed every 1 year.
填料需要 1 年更换一次。
5 Operation and maintenance
of bare vacuum pump
泵头运行维护指南
Vacuum pumps
Compressors
Operating Manual Types 2BE3 30. to
72. / 2BE4 30. to 72.
Pos: 2 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Titelbild/2BE3/2BE4 30.-72. Titelbild @ 8\mod_1344953365879_6.doc @ 67582 @ @ 1

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Titel ===

Edition 01/2016 Nash – Zweigniederlassung der

Print no. OM5004 Gardner Denver Deutschland GmbH
Language EN Katzwanger Straße 150
90461 Nuremberg
Germany
Phone: +49 (0) 911-1454-5256
Fax: +49 (0) 911-1454-5252
Internet: http://www.GDNash.com

We reserve the right to make technical changes.

Read carefully before use.
Save for future use.

Table of contents
1 About this document .................................... 6
1.1 Target groups ................................................. 6
1.2 Other applicable documents ........................... 6
1.3 Warnings and symbols.................................... 7
1.4 Technical terms .............................................. 8
2 Safety ............................................................. 9
2.1 Intended use ................................................... 9
2.2 General safety instructions ............................. 9
2.2.1 Product safety ................................................. 9
2.2.2 Operator’s obligations ................................... 10
2.2.3 Obligations of personnel ............................... 10
2.3 Specific hazards ........................................... 10
2.3.1 Explosion-hazard area .................................. 10
2.3.2 Hazardous pumped fluids and seal liquids .... 10
3 Layout and function.................................... 11
3.1 Name plates .................................................. 11
3.1.1 Typenschild ................................................... 11
3.1.2 ATEX plate .................................................... 11
3.2 Layout ........................................................... 12
3.3 Shaft seals .................................................... 12
3.3.1 Mechanical seals .......................................... 12
3.3.2 Stuffing boxes ............................................... 12
3.4 Shaft bearing ................................................ 12
3.5 Function ........................................................ 13
3.5.1 Seal liquid ..................................................... 13
4 Transport, storage, and disposal .............. 14
4.1 Transport ...................................................... 14
4.1.1 Unpacking and inspection on delivery........... 14
4.1.2 Lifting ............................................................ 15
4.2 Treating new machines ................................. 16
4.2.1 Standard storage treatment .......................... 16
4.2.2 Long-term storage......................................... 16
4.3 Treating machines for storage which have
been shut down temporarily .......................... 16
Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72.
4.3.1 Treating stainless steel machines for storage16
4.3.2 Treating gray cast-iron or steel machines for
storage .......................................................... 17
4.4 Storage ......................................................... 17
4.5 Removing the preservative ........................... 17
4.6 Disposal ........................................................ 17
5 Setup and connection ................................ 18
5.1 Preparing the setup ....................................... 18
5.1.1 Checking machine condition ......................... 18
5.1.2 Checking the ambient conditions .................. 18
5.1.3 Preparing the installation site ........................ 18
5.1.4 Preparing the foundation and surface ........... 18
5.1.5 Removing the preservative ........................... 18
5.1.6 Balancing the rotors ...................................... 19
5.2 Installation on a foundation/steel construction
...................................................................... 19
5.2.1 Preparing the foundation/steel construction .. 19
5.2.2 Fastening the base frame ............................. 19
5.2.3 Setting the machine onto the base frame ..... 19
5.3 Installation on foundation blocks ................... 20
5.4 Installing the motor ........................................ 20
5.5 Planning the pipelines ................................... 21
5.5.1 Specifying supports and flange connections . 21
5.5.2 Specifying nominal diameters ....................... 21
5.5.3 Discharging leaks.......................................... 21
5.5.4 Providing safety and control devices
(recommended)............................................. 21
5.6 Connecting the pipe lines .............................. 22
5.6.1 Keeping the pipe lines clean ......................... 22
5.6.2 Installing the seal liquid line .......................... 22
5.6.3 Installing auxiliary pipes (if available) ............ 22
5.6.4 Installing the inlet pipe .................................. 22
5.6.5 Installing the outlet pipe ................................ 22
5.6.6 Compressor operation: connecting the bypass
pipe ............................................................... 22
5.6.7 Checking the stress-free pipe connection ..... 22
5.6.8 Checking the pipes for leaks ......................... 23
5.7 Electrical connection ..................................... 23
5.7.1 Connecting the motor .................................... 23
01/2016 2
5.8 Fine-adjustment of the coupling .................... 23 7.4 Ordering spare parts ..................................... 34

5.9 Installing safety guards ................................. 23

8 Troubleshooting.......................................... 35
5.10 Checking after assembly............................... 23
9 Appendix...................................................... 39
6 Operation ..................................................... 24
9.1 Drawings ....................................................... 39
6.1 Preparations for the initial start-up ................ 24
9.1.1 Spare parts list .............................................. 39
6.1.1 Identifying the machine version .................... 24
9.1.2 Exploded drawings ........................................ 41
6.1.2 Removing the preservative ........................... 24
9.1.3 Dimensions ................................................... 42
6.1.3 Lubricating the bearings................................ 24
9.1.4 Assembly washer cross-section .................... 43
6.1.4 Preparing auxiliary systems (if available) ...... 24
9.1.5 Sectional drawing of stuffing box .................. 43
6.1.5 Filling with seal liquid .................................... 24
9.1.6 Sectional drawings of bearing carriers .......... 43
6.1.6 Adjusting the seal liquid level before startup . 24
9.1.7 Circuit diagram examples ............................. 46
6.1.7 Adjusting the shaft seal's flushing liquid ........ 25
9.2 Technical specifications ................................ 51
6.1.8 Checking the direction of rotation ................. 25
9.2.1 Ambient conditions ........................................ 51
6.2 Start-up ......................................................... 25
9.2.2 Sound pressure level .................................... 51
6.2.1 Switching on ................................................. 25
9.2.3 Vibration ........................................................ 51
6.2.2 Checking operation ....................................... 27
9.2.4 Tightening torques ........................................ 51
6.2.3 Switching off ................................................. 27
9.2.5 Weight specifications .................................... 52
6.3 Shutting down the pump ............................... 27
9.2.6 Gland packing sizes ...................................... 52
6.4 Start-up following a shutdown period ............ 28
9.2.7 Shaft seals .................................................... 53
7 Maintenance ................................................ 29 9.2.8 Pumped fluids ............................................... 53

7.1 Inspections .................................................... 29 9.2.9 Seal liquids.................................................... 53

7.1.1 Inspection ..................................................... 29 9.2.10 Flushing liquid for shaft sealing with external
flushing ......................................................... 56
7.1.2 Reinspection ................................................. 30
9.2.11 Lubricants ..................................................... 57
7.1.3 Antifriction bearings lubricated with grease... 30
9.2.12 Descaling solutions ....................................... 57
7.1.4 Mechanical seals .......................................... 30
9.2.13 Preservative .................................................. 57
7.1.5 Stuffing boxes ............................................... 31
9.2.14 Flange loads according to ISO 5199 ............. 58
7.1.6 Cleaning the machine ................................... 32
9.3 Safety certificate ........................................... 59
7.2 Disassembly ................................................. 33

7.2.1 Returning the machine to the manufacturer .. 33

7.2.2 Preparations for disassembly ........................ 34

7.3 Assembly ...................................................... 34

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 3

Table of figures Fig. 28 Overview of forces and torques to which the
flanges are subjected ............................... 58
Fig. 1 Type plate................................................. 11

Fig. 2 ATEX plate ............................................... 11

Fig. 3 Layout 2BE3/4 30.-72. .............................. 12

Fig. 4 Fastening lifting gear to machine group ... 15

Fig. 5 Fastening lifting gear to individual machines

................................................................. 15

Fig. 6 Installation on foundation blocks .............. 20

Fig. 7 Assembly washer ..................................... 30

Fig. 8 Removing the packing rings ..................... 31

Fig. 9 Extractor for lantern gland (3.2 mm (1/8 in.)

wire) ......................................................... 31

Fig. 10 Inserting a new gland packing .................. 31

Fig. 11 Exploded view of vacuum pump 2BE3/4

(delivered version may differ) ................... 41

Fig. 12 Main dimensions ...................................... 42

Fig. 13 Assembly washer ..................................... 43

Fig. 14 Stuffing box .............................................. 43

Fig. 15 Bearing carrier on drive-end, 2BE3 .......... 43

Fig. 16 Bearing carrier on drive-end, 2BE4 .......... 44

Fig. 17 Bearing carrier on non-drive-end, 2BE3 ... 44

Fig. 18 Bearing carrier on non-drive-end, 2BE4 ... 45

Fig. 19 Circuit diagram example for pump with

mounted fluid separator ............................ 46

Fig. 20 Circuit diagram example for pump without

fluid separator........................................... 46

Fig. 21 Circuit diagram example for pump with

mounted fluid separator and self-regulating
seal liquid circuit ....................................... 47

Fig. 22 Circuit diagram example for pump with side

separator .................................................. 47

Fig. 23 Circuit diagram example for more than one

pump with a common fluid container ........ 47

Fig. 24 Circuit diagram example for more than one

pump with a raised fluid container ............ 47

Fig. 25 Circuit diagram example for compressor

with pressure connection at top ................ 49

Fig. 26 Circuit diagram example for compressor

with pressure connection at bottom .......... 49

Fig. 27 Circuit diagram example for compressor

with self-regulating seal liquid circuit ........ 49

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 4

List of tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10 Troubleshooting list .................................. 38
Table 11 Designation of components according to
part numbers ............................................ 40
Table 12 Main dimension ........................................ 42
Table 13 Connection threads for pipe for draining old
grease ...................................................... 45
Table 14 Ambient conditions ................................... 51
Table 15 Sound pressure level ................................ 51
Table 16 Permitted vibration speeds ....................... 51
Table 17 Tightening torques for bolts of strength class
A4-70 (≤ M20) or 8.8 and higher .............. 51
Table 18 Tightening torques for bolts of strength class
4.8 to 6.8 .................................................. 51
Pos: 4 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Zu dieser Anleitung @ 8\mod_1341243550302_6.doc @ 60732 @ 1 @ 1
Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72.
Target groups and their duties.................... 6
Other applicable documents and their
purpose ...................................................... 6
Warnings and consequences of
disregarding them....................................... 7
Symbols and their meaning ........................ 7
Technical terms and their meaning ............ 8
Labeling the shaft after balancing ............. 19
Measures to be taken if the machine is shut
down ......................................................... 27
Shutdown measures depending on the seal
liquid properties ........................................ 28
Fault/number assignment ......................... 35
01/2016
Table 19 Weight specifications ................................ 52
Table 20 Technical data for gland packing .............. 52
Table 21 Shaft seal ................................................. 53
Table 22 Compressor pumped fluid ........................ 53
Table 23 Fluid permitted for vacuum pump ............. 53
Table 24 Requirements for seal liquids ................... 53
Table 25 Seal liquid flow rate in compressor mode
(ISO units) ................................................ 54
Table 26 Seal liquid flow rate in compressor mode
(US units) ................................................. 54
Table 27 Seal liquid flow rate in vacuum mode (ISO
units)......................................................... 55
Table 28 Seal liquid flow rate in vacuum mode (US
units)......................................................... 55
Tab. 29 Flushing liquid for shaft sealing with external
flushing ..................................................... 56
Table 30 Lubricants to be used for antifriction
bearings.................................................... 57
Table 31 Minimum quantities for greasing antifriction
bearings.................................................... 57
Table 32 Descaling solutions................................... 57
Table 33 Forces and torques permissibly applicable
to the flanges (ISO units) .......................... 58
Table 34 Forces and torques permissibly applicable
to the flanges (US units) ........................... 58
Table 35 Safety certificate ....................................... 59
5
 Pos: 5 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

1 About this document

This manual:
 is part of the machine
 applies to all types noted on the bottom of the
page
 describes safe and appropriate operation during all
operating phases
Pos: 6 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Zielgruppen @ 8\mod_1341243732276_6.doc @ 60751 @ 2 @ 1

1.1 Target groups

Target group Duty
Operating company  Keep this manual accessible at the site of
operation of the equipment, including for later use.
 Make sure that personnel read and follow the
instructions in this manual and the other applicable
documents, especially the safety instructions and
warnings.
 Observe any additional rules and regulations that
relate to the system.
 Assign only qualified personnel to work with the
machine.

Qualified personnel, fitter  Read, observe, and follow this manual and the
other applicable documents, especially all safety
instructions and warnings.

Table 1 Target groups and their duties

Pos: 7 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Mitgeltende Dokumente @ 8\mod_1344006312608_6.doc @ 63928 @ 2 @ 1

1.2 Other applicable documents

Document Purpose
Dimension drawing Dimensions, installation dimensions
Text sheet Description of the dimension drawing
Spare parts list Ordering spare parts
ATEX supplementary operating manual Notes on use in explosion-hazard areas
Supplementary operating manual for components e.g. motor, mechanical seal, coupling
included in scope of delivery

Table 2 Other applicable documents and their purpose

Pos: 8 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 6

Pos: 9 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Warnhinweise und Symbole @ 8\mod_1344008599378_6.doc @ 63947 @ 2 @ 1

1.3 Warnings and symbols

Warning Risk level Consequences of disregard
Immediate acute risk Death, serious bodily harm

Potential acute risk Death, serious bodily harm

Potentially hazardous situation Minor bodily harm

Potentially hazardous situation Material damage

Table 3 Warnings and consequences of disregarding them

Symbol Meaning
Safety warning sign
 Take note of all information highlighted by the safety warning
sign and follow the instructions to avoid injury or death.
 Instruction
1. , 2. , etc. Multiple-step instructions

 Requirement

 Cross reference
Information, advice

Table 4 Symbols and their meaning

Pos: 10 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Fachbegriffe @ 8\mod_1344236869051_6.doc @ 63971 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 7

1.4 Technical terms
Term Meaning
Test pressure Pressure applied to the machine during leak test.
also:
– Testing pressure

Unit Assembly comprising machine and drive motor.

Intlet pressure Pressure of the gases/vapors to be pumped at the machine's inlet connection.
Drive end Side of the machine to which the drive is connected
also:
– D-side
– AS
– DE (drive end)

Outlet pressure Pressure of the gases/vapors to be pumped at the machine's outlet branch or
flange.
Seal liquid Liquid forming a liquid ring in the machine which serves in clearance sealing while
at the same time aids in dissipating compression heat.
Qualified personnel Persons who, due to their training, experience, and instruction as well as their
knowledge of applicable standards, regulations, accident-prevention provisions,
and work environment, are capable of performing certain tasks (e.g.
commissioning, operation, maintenance, repair) and who, in doing so, are capable
of identifying and avoiding hazards.
This includes knowledge of first aid and of the local emergency facilities.
Such persons must receive express authorization for performing the respectively
required tasks from the party responsible for safe operation of the system.
Machine In this context: vacuum pump or compressor.
Assembly that takes in, delivers, and compresses gases and/or vapors as well as
generates vacuum or overpressure. The drive is not considered part of the
machine in this respect.
Machine group Two or more machines connected to one another by couplings and mounted on a
joint base frame.
Non-drive end Side of the machine to which no drive is connected.
also:
– N-side
– BS
– NDE (non-drive
end)

Flushing liquid Liquid used to supply the shaft seals (mechanical seals as well as gland packings).
Vacuum pump Machine for generating a vacuum
Compressor Machine for generating overpressure
Discharge pressure Pressure of the gases/vapors to be pumped at the machine's outlet flange, outlet
pressure.

Table 5 Technical terms and their meaning

Pos: 11 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1
Pos: 12 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Sicherheit - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344237573995_6.doc @ 63990 @ 1 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 8

 Prevention of obvious misuse (examples)

2 Safety  Observe the operating limits of the machine

concerning temperature, pressure, flow rate and
The manufacturer is not liable for damages motor speed ( Chapter 9.2.1, Page 51,
caused by a failure to observe the provisions of Chapter 9.2.9, Page 53).
this documentation.
 When using auxiliary systems, ensure there is a
continuous supply of the appropriate operating
Pos: 13 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 8\mod_1344237857968_6.doc @ 64009 @ 2 @ 1

medium.
2.1 Intended use  Only use the setup specified in this operating
manual. For example, the following are not
 Only use the pump to pump the stipulated fluids allowed:
( order data sheet).
– Overhead installation
 Operate machine only with the stipulated seal
liquids ( order data sheet). – Installation in the immediate vicinity of
extreme heat or cold sources
 Avoid dry running:
Damage, such as the destruction of mechanical – Installation too close to a wall
seals and plastic parts, will occur within only a Pos: 14 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344238398938_6.doc @ 64028 @ 2 @ 1

few seconds.
2.2 General safety instructions
– Make sure the pump is only operated with,
and never without, seal liquid. Observe the following regulations before
 Avoid cavitation: carrying out any work.

– Always keep the suction-side fitting fully

open and do not use it to adjust the flow
Pos: 15 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Produktsicherheit @ 8\mod_1344238763023_6.doc @ 64047 @ 3 @ 1

rate.
2.2.1 Product safety
– If there is a risk of cavitation, have the
machine factory-fitted with a cavitation The machine has been constructed according to the
protection device if one is available for this latest technology and recognized technical safety
machine type (order code “-F80”). rules. Nevertheless, operation of the machine can
 Avoid overheating: still put the life and health of the user or third parties
at risk or damage the machine or other property.
– Do not operate the machine while the
discharge-side fitting is closed.  Only operate the machine if it is in perfect
technical condition and only use it as intended,
 Avoid damage to the motor:
remaining aware of safety and risks, and adhere
– Do not switch on the motor more than the to the instructions in this manual.
maximum permissible number of times per
 Keep this manual and all other applicable
hour ( manufacturer's specifications).
documents complete, legible and accessible to
 Consult the manufacturer about any other use. personnel at all times.
 Machines delivered without a motor must be  Refrain from any procedures and actions that
assembled into a machine group according to would pose a risk to personnel or third parties.
the provisions of EC Machine Directive
 In the event of any safety-relevant malfunctions,
2006/42/EC.
shut down the machine immediately and have
the problem corrected by the personnel
responsible.
 In addition to the entire documentation for the
product, comply with statutory or other safety
and accident-prevention regulations and the
applicable standards and guidelines in the
country where the system is operated.
Pos: 16 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Pflichten des Betreibers @ 8\mod_1344239041960_6.doc @ 64066 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 9

2.2.2 Operator’s obligations
Safety-conscious operation
 Only operate the machine if it is in perfect
technical condition and only use it as intended,
remaining aware of safety and risks, and adhere
to the instructions in this manual.
 Ensure that the following safety aspects are
observed and monitored:
– Adherence to intended use
– Statutory or other safety and accident-
prevention regulations
– Safety regulations governing the handling of
hazardous substances
– Applicable standards and guidelines in the
country where the machine is operated
 Make personal protective equipment available.
Qualified personnel
 Make sure all personnel tasked with work on the
machine has read and understood this manual
and all other applicable documents, especially
the safety, maintenance and repair information,
before they start any work.
 Organize responsibilities, areas of competence
and the supervision of personnel.
 Ensure that all work is carried out by specialist
technicians only:
– Fitting, repair and maintenance work
– Work on the electrical system
 Make sure that trainee personnel only work on
the machine under the supervision of specialist
technicians.
Safety equipment
 Provide the following safety equipment and
verify its functionality:
– For hot, cold and moving parts: on-site
safety guards for the machine
– For possible electrostatic charges: provide
the necessary grounding
 Do not operate the machine if the safety devices
are defective:
– Regularly check and ensure that they
function.
Warranty
 Obtain the manufacturer’s approval prior to
carrying out any modifications, repairs, or
alterations during the warranty period.
Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72.
 Only use OEM parts or parts that have been
approved by the manufacturer.
Pos: 17 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Pflichten des Personals @ 8\mod_1344239180164_6.doc @ 64085 @ 3 @ 1
2.2.3 Obligations of personnel
 All directions given on the machine must be
followed (and kept legible), e.g. the arrow
indicating the direction of rotation and the
markings for fluid connections.
 Machine, coupling guard and add-on
components:
– Do not step on them or use as climbing aids
– Do not use them to support boards, ramps or
beams
– Do not use them as a fixing point for winches
or supports
– Do not use them for storing paper or similar
materials
– Do not use hot machine or motor
components as a heating source
– Do not de-ice using gas burners or similar
tools
 Do not remove the safety guards for hot, cold or
moving parts during operation.
 Use personal protective equipment whenever
necessary.
 Only carry out work on the machine when it is at
a standstill.
 Isolate the motor from its supply voltage and
keep it locked when carrying out any fitting or
maintenance work.
 Reinstall the safety equipment as required by
regulations after any work on the machine.
Pos: 18 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Spezielle Gefahren @ 8\mod_1344239238308_6.doc @ 64104 @ 233 @ 1
2.3 Specific hazards
2.3.1 Explosion-hazard area
 See the ATEX supplementary operating manual
( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).
2.3.2 Hazardous pumped fluids and seal
liquids
 Follow the safety regulations for handling
hazardous substances when handling
dangerous (e.g. hot, flammable, toxic, or
potentially harmful) pumped fluids and seal
liquids.
 Use personal protective equipment when
carrying out any work on the machine.
Pos: 19 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Aufbau und Funktion - Kennzeichnung @ 8\mod_1344241696504_6.doc @ 64123 @ 1233 @ 1
01/2016 10
 3.1.2 ATEX plate

3 Layout and function

3.1 Name plates

3.1.1 Typenschild

Fig. 2 ATEX plate

Fig. 1
1 Year of manufacture
2 Intended use – vacuum pump or compressor
1 Year of manufacture
2 Intended use – vacuum pump or compressor
3 Serial number
Type plate 4 Type
5 Permissible ATEX area
Pos: 20 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

3 Serial number
4 Type
Pos: 21 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/2BE3/4 30.-72. Aufbau @ 8\mod_1344584894404_6.doc @ 66361 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 11

3.2 Layout

Fig. 3 Layout 2BE3/4 30.-72.

1 Shaft 4 Non-drive-end endshield 7 Drive-end endshield

2 Bearing housing 5 Port plate
3 Inlet/discharge connection 6 Impeller
Pos: 22 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1
Pos: 23 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Wellendichtungen - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344242578340_6.doc @ 64161 @ 2 @ 1

3.3 Shaft seals 3.3.2 Stuffing boxes

The type designation on the type plate specifies the The stuffing box must always leak slightly to
installed shaft seal ( Chapter 9.2.7, Page 53). dissipate the frictional heat.
Pos: 24 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Gleitringdichtungen @ 8\mod_1344242629778_6.doc @ 64180 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.1 Mechanical seals

Mechanical seals have functional leaks. For  Stuffing box with internal flushing
further details, refer to the supplementary  Stuffing box with external flushing
operating manual ( Chapter 1.2, Page 6). Pos: 26 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Wellenlagerung @ 8\mod_1344243305000_6.doc @ 64218 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 Shaft bearing

 Single-acting mechanical seal The fixed bearing on the non-drive end is the
 Double-acting mechanical seal machine's guide bearing. It bears radial and axial
Pos: 25 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Stopfbuchsen @ 8\mod_1344243233678_6.doc @ 64199 @ 3 @ 1

forces. It is designed to bear normal axial loads

generated through operation with flexible couplings.
The drive-end bearing only bears radial forces.
The bearings are grease lubricated.
Pos: 27 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Funktion (einstufig) @ 8\mod_1344243359059_6.doc @ 64237 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 12

3.5 Function
In liquid ring pumps, an impeller rotates inside a
cylindrical or elliptical housing eccentric to the shaft.
The impeller's rotation results in the seal liquid
becoming a revolving ring of liquid in the housing.
Due to the eccentric position of the rotor, the ring of
liquid oscillates inwards and outwards in a piston-
like manner within the impeller's vane chambers.
At the suction end, the ring of liquid detaches from
the impeller hub. The gas enters into the enlarged
volume through the inlet connection.
At the pressure end, the ring of liquid approaches
the impeller hub again and expels the compressed
gas through the discharge connection.
Pos: 28 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Betriebsflüssigkeit @ 8\mod_1344243403040_6.doc @ 64256 @ 3 @ 1

3.5.1 Seal liquid

Usable seal liquids ( Chapter 9.2.9,

Page 53).

Seal liquid is constantly expelled along with the

compressed gas. For this reason, new, cooled seal
liquid constantly needs to be supplied to the ring of
liquid.
Purposes of the seal liquid:
 Clearance sealing in the machine
 Establishment of the liquid ring
 Dissipation of compression heat
 Cooling and lubrication of the shaft seal for
version with internal flushing
Pos: 29 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/UEB_Transport, Lagerung, Entsorgung @ 8\mod_1344245889210_6.doc @ 64275 @ 1 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 13

4 Transport, storage, and
disposal
Pos: 30 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Transportieren @ 8\mod_1344245931023_6.doc @ 64294 @ 23 @ 1

4.1 Transport

Observe the weight specifications

( Chapter 9.2.5, Page 52).

4.1.1 Unpacking and inspection on delivery

Standard scope of delivery includes only the

machine itself (excluding additional
components such as fittings, valves, gate
valves etc.)

1. Unpack the machine/package on delivery and

inspect it for transport damage.
2. Report any transport damage to GD Nash
immediately.
3. Dispose of packaging material according to local
regulations.
Pos: 31 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Anheben @ 8\mod_1347371600549_6.doc @ 69361 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 14

4.1.2 Lifting
Pos: 32 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/2BE3/4 30.-72. Anheben @ 8\mod_1344608217504_6.doc @ 66501 @ @ 1

DANGER

Death or crushing of limbs caused by falling or

overturning loads!
 Use lifting gear appropriate for the total weight to
be transported.
 Fasten the lifting gear as illustrated. Make sure
that no connected fittings are damaged.
 Never fasten lifting gear to the shaft.
 Never fasten lifting gear to the motor eyebolt.
 Do not stand under suspended loads.
 Set the load down on a level surface.

Fig. 4 Fastening lifting gear to machine group

Do not remove the rotor holding device (where
provided), which is protecting the roller bearing
until the transmission element is fitted.
 For transport when the transmission
element has been fitted, undertake suitable
measures to support the rotor axially.

Fig. 5 Fastening lifting gear to individual machines

1. Lift machine/package correctly.
2. Lower machine/package correctly.
Pos: 33 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren neuer Maschinen @ 9\mod_1379317681170_6.doc @ 87651 @ 233 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 15

4.2 Treating new machines 4.3 Treating machines for storage
which have been shut down
4.2.1 Standard storage treatment
temporarily
The machine has been sufficiently treated with
anti-corrosion agents and has undergone If a machine is shut down temporarily, it must
production measures to allow for a storage be documented.
period of up to approximately 4 months. Documentation is to be made available to the
manufacturer (GD Nash) on request.
4.2.2 Long-term storage Pos: 35 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren - Edelstahlmaschinen @ 8\mod_1344246512605_6.doc @ 64351 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.1 Treating stainless steel machines for

If the machine has been packed for carriage
overseas, i.e. sealed air-tight using silica gel, storage
the machine can be stored (if storage
conditions are strictly observed) for up to 8 1. Remove drain plug so that the machine can
months. drain.
2. Turn machine until it has drained as fully as
To store the machine for an additional 8 months possible.
once the first 8 months have expired: 3. Screw drain plug back in.
1. Open the seaworthy packaging. 4. Coat or spray all exposed machined metal
2. Fill the machine one-third full of anti-corrosion surfaces (e.g. flange and shaft surfaces) with a
agent (one-half for systems). suitable preservative agent (e.g. Hough ton's
Rust Veto #342 or Cortec VCI 369). Wait for it to
3. Turn the shaft manually 15 to 20 revolutions.
dry completely.
4. Reclose the flanges and apertures.
– For machines with gland packing: Unscrew
5. Add sufficient desiccant as well as a new stuffing box flanges and remove packing
humidity indicator. rings.
6. Reseal the machine air-tight. – Drain excess water.
7. Document steps 1 to 6. – Apply a suitable preservative agent (e.g.
Houghton’s Rust Veto #342) to the shaft
Carry out and document the following checks once surfaces in the packing area.
a month throughout the entire storage period:
– Insert new packing rings and re-assemble
 Check that the foil is undamaged. stuffing box.
 Check if the humidity indicator has registered 5. Turn the impeller through 5 to 10 revolutions
humidity. every 4 weeks.
 If the foil is damaged or the indicator has
Pos: 36 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren - Grauguss/Stahl @ 8\mod_1344246620093_6.doc @ 64370 @ 3 @ 1

registered humidity, carry out steps 1 to 6.

After 16 months, this procedure is no longer

suitable to treat the machine longer.
 Turn the impeller through 5 to 10
revolutions every 2 weeks. Refill with
preservative every fourth time.

Pos: 34 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren vorübergehend - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344246382131_6.doc @ 64332 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 16

4.3.2 Treating gray cast-iron or steel machines 4.5 Removing the preservative
for storage
1. Make sure that the preservative is compatible
1. Remove drain plug so that the machine can with the seal liquids and pumped fluids.
drain.
2. If necessary, purge machine before
2. Turn drive shaft manually through 5 to 10 commissioning.
revolutions to drain the remaining liquid. Pos: 39 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Entsorgen @ 8\mod_1344246838336_6.doc @ 64427 @ 2 @ 1

3. Screw drain plug back in. 4.6 Disposal

4. Fill the machine up to one-third (one-half for
systems) with treatment agent via the flanges or Plastic parts can be contaminated by
inspection apertures ( Chapter 9.2.13, poisonous or radioactive pumped liquids or seal
liquids to such an extent that cleaning will be
Page 57).
insufficient.
5. Turn the shaft manually through 5 to 10
revolutions.
6. For storage, apply flange covers and seal them
WARNING
using adhesive tape.
Risk of poisoning and environmental damage by
7. Coat or spray all exposed machined metal the pumped fluid and seal liquids!
surfaces (e.g. flange and shaft surfaces) with a
suitable preservative agent (e.g. Houghton’s  Use protective equipment when carrying out any
work on the machine.
Rust Veto #342 or Cortec VCI 369). Wait for it to
dry completely.  Prior to the disposal of the machine:
– For machines with gland packing: Unscrew – Collect and dispose of any leaking fluids or
stuffing box flanges and remove packing grease escaping from the bearings in
rings. accordance with local regulations.
– Drain excess water. – Neutralize residues of pumped fluid and seal
– Apply a suitable preservative agent (e.g. liquids in the machine.
Houghton’s Rust Veto #342) to the shaft – Remove the preservative ( Chapter 4.5,
surfaces in the packing area. Page 17).
– Insert new packing rings and re-assemble  Remove the plastic parts and dispose of them in
stuffing box. accordance with local regulations.
8. Turn the impeller through 5 to 10 revolutions
every 2 weeks. Refill with preservative every
fourth time.  Dispose of the machine according to local
Pos: 37 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Lagern @ 8\mod_1344246711300_6.doc @ 64389 @ 2 @ 1
regulations.
Pos: 40 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Aufstellung und Anschluss @ 8\mod_1344247368451_6.doc @ 64446 @ 1 @ 1

4.4 Storage

NOTE

Material damage due to inappropriate storage!

 Treat and store the machine properly.

1. Make sure the storage room meets the following

conditions:
– Dry
– Stays above freezing
– Vibration-free
– Level
2. Turn the rotor according to the preservation
manual. ( Chapter 4.2, Page 16; Chapter 4.3,
Page 16).
Pos: 38 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservierung entfernen @ 8\mod_1344246785678_6.doc @ 64408 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 17

 5.1.2 Checking the ambient conditions

5 Setup and connection  Make sure the required ambient conditions are
fulfilled ( Chapter 9.2.1, Page 51).
For machines in explosion-hazard areas
( Chapter 1.2, Page 6). 5.1.3 Preparing the installation site

NOTE

Risk of freezing during installation work in low

NOTE temperatures!

Material damage due to distortion or passage of  Make sure that no water enters into the machine
electrical current in the bearing! or any already connected pipes.

 Do not make any structural modifications to the

machine group or machine casing.
 Ensure the installation site meets the following
 Do not carry out any welding work on the machine conditions:
group or machine casing. – Machine is freely accessible from all sides
– Sufficient space for the installation/removal
of the pipes and for maintenance and repair
NOTE work, especially for the removal and
installation of the machine and the motor
Risk of damage to bearings!
– Machine not exposed to external vibrations
 Observe the operating instructions. (damage to bearings)
 Do not remove the rotor holding device (where – Frost protection
provided) protecting roller bearing before – Grounding in accordance with local
transmission element is fitted.
regulations and in accordance with
 Do not attach crane rope to bearings. explosion-protection regulations if applicable
( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).
 Remove anti-corrosion coating from shaft end with
acetone. Do not use scrapers or emery cloth. 5.1.4 Preparing the foundation and surface
Afterwards, coat shaft ends with grease.
Setup options:
– Foundation/steel construction
NOTE – Foundation blocks

Material damage caused by dirt!

 Make sure the foundation and surface meet the
 Do not remove any caps or transport and sealing following conditions:
covers until immediately before connecting the
pipes to the machine. – Level
– Clean (no oil, dust or other impurities)
– Capable of bearing the weight of the
Pos: 41 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Aufstellung vorbereiten @ 8\mod_1344257750243_6.doc @ 64465 @ 2333333 @ 1

5.1 Preparing the setup package and all operating forces

– The package is stable and cannot tip over
5.1.1 Checking machine condition
5.1.5 Removing the preservative
1. Check the machine and components for
damage.  If the machine is to be put into operation
immediately after setup and connection:
2. Check the rotor/shaft assembly for smooth
Remove the preservative prior to set-up
rotation.
( Chapter 4.5, Page 17).
3. Check the machine interior for foreign matter. To
do so, remove the transport covers and check
accessible interior spaces for foreign matter.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 18

5.1.6 Balancing the rotors
5.2.2 Fastening the base frame

The rotors are balanced in accordance with

DIN ISO 8821. Standard concrete shrinks when setting and is
The DIN ISO 8821 norm requires labeling of not suitable for use as a cast bed and cast filler
the components according to the applied for the base frame.
method. After balancing, the front face of the  Only use foundation concrete.
shaft near the shaft key groove must be labeled
with the following letters. 1. Set base frame upon foundation/steel
construction.

Method Code 2. Do not use shrinking foundation concrete as a

cast bed for the base frame.
Half key H
3. For box-type base frames: Fill the base frame
Full key F
with foundation concrete.
No key N 4. Allow foundation concrete to set.
Table 6 Labeling the shaft after balancing 5. Fasten base frame using anchor bolts.

Pos: 42 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Mit Fundament/Stahlkonstruktion aufstellen @ 8\mod_1344342821608_6.doc @ 64491 @ 2333 @ 1

5.2.3 Setting the machine onto the base frame

5.2 Installation on a
foundation/steel construction NOTE

Material damage due to inappropriate alignment!

NOTE
 Compensate for height differences exactly as
described.
Material damage due to distortion of the base
frame!  Align the drive train.
 Place the base frame on the foundation/steel
construction and fasten it as described below. 1. Lift machine ( Chapter 4.1.2, Page 15).
2. Set the machine onto the base frame.
5.2.1 Preparing the foundation/steel 3. Make sure that the machine sits equally on all
construction four feet. If necessary, compensate completely
for the remaining distance between foot and
1. Check horizontal alignment of the
base frame by, for example, using metal shims.
foundation/steel construction using a surveyor's
level. 4. Bolt the machine's feet to the base frame.
Pos: 43 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Mit Fundamentklötzen aufstellen @ 8\mod_1344343270796_6.doc @ 64510 @ 2 @ 1

2. Compensate for irregularities using metal shims

so that a supporting surface with a maximum
tolerance of T is established.

Calculation of tolerance T:
T = 0.0005 * (L + W)
T = flatness tolerance (ISO 1101)
L = total length of base frame
W = total width of base frame
[mm or inches]

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 19

5.3 Installation on foundation 8. Allow foundation concrete to set.
blocks 9. Remove alignment frame.
10. Set the machine onto the foundation blocks.

NOTE

Material damage due to inappropriate alignment!

 Compensate for height differences exactly as

described.

 Align the drive train.

11. Make sure that the machine sits equally on all

four feet. If necessary, compensate completely
for the remaining distance between foot and
foundation block by, for example, using metal
shims.
12. Bolt the machine's feet to the foundation blocks.
Pos: 44 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Motor montieren @ 8\mod_1344343857512_6.doc @ 64529 @ 2 @ 1

Fig. 6 Installation on foundation blocks 5.4 Installing the motor

1 Alignment frame Observe the manufacturer's assembly and
2 Machine wedge operating instructions.
3 Wood or steel base plate
4 Bare foundation
5 Aperture (block up with piece of cloth,
styrofoam or similar) NOTE
6 Foundation block
1. Drill holes into the foundation at the appropriate Material damage caused by knocks and bumps!
positions. Dimensions in the dimension drawing
 Keep the coupling halves properly aligned when
( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).
slipping them on.
2. Construct an alignment frame.
The dimensions and the fastening points for the  Do not knock or hit any components of the pump.
machine correspond to those of a base frame.
1. Smear a very thin coat of molybdenum disulfide
3. Attach the foundation blocks to the alignment
(e.g. Molykote) on the shaft ends of the machine
frame and align precisely.
and motor.
4. Set the alignment frame onto the foundation.
2. Insert the shaft keys.
Guide the foundation blocks into the bore holes
in the foundation when doing so. 3. Without a mounting fixture: Remove the rubber
buffers and heat the coupling halves up to
5. Check horizontal alignment using the surveyor's
approximately 100 °C.
level.
4. Slide on the machine-side and motor-side
6. Compensate for irregularities so that a
coupling halves until the shaft end is flush with
supporting surface with a maximum tolerance of
the coupling hub. When doing this, ensure the
T is established.
prescribed spacing between the two halves of
Calculation of tolerance T: the coupling is maintained ( Chapter 1.2,
T = 0.0005 * (L + W) Page 6, assembly instructions of the coupling).

T = flatness tolerance (ISO 1101) 5. Use suitable metal shims on the motor to align
L = total length of base frame the end of the motor shaft to the height of the
W = total width of base frame machine shaft end.

[mm or inches] 6. Screw in the motor bolts, but do not tighten them
yet.
7. Fill the bore holes in the foundation with Pos: 45 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Rohrleitungen planen @ 8\mod_1344344038692_6.doc @ 64548 @ 2333 @ 1

foundation concrete.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 20

5.5 Planning the pipelines
Typical pipeline diagrams ( Chapter 9.1.7,
Page 46).
Observe the technical specifications on
pumped fluids, seal liquids, permissible
pressures (intake, discharge, and test
pressure) ( Chapter 9.2, Page 51).
5.5.1 Specifying supports and flange
connections
NOTE
Material damage due to excessive forces and
torques exerted by the piping on the machine!
 Do not exceed the permissible values ( Chapter
9.2.14, Page 58).
1. Calculate the pipeline forces, taking every
possible operating condition into account:
– Cold/warm
– Empty/full
– Depressurized/pressurized
– Shift in position of flanges
2. Ensure the pipe supports have permanent low-
friction properties and do not seize up due to
corrosion.
5.5.2 Specifying nominal diameters
Keep the pressure drop in the pipes as low as
possible.
1. Make sure the nominal inlet pipe diameter is ≥
the nominal inlet flange diameter.
2. Make sure the nominal discharge pipe diameter
is ≥ the nominal discharge flange diameter.
Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72.
5.5.3 Discharging leaks
WARNING
Risk of injury and poisoning due to hazardous
pumped fluids and seal liquids!
 Safely collect any leaking fluids, then discharge
and dispose of it in accordance with
environmental regulations.
1. Provide equipment for collecting and
discharging leaking liquids.
2. Ensure that leaking fluids can be discharged
freely.
Pos: 46 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Sicherheits- und Kontrolleinrichtungen vorsehen @ 8\mod_1344344301963_6.doc @ 64567 @ 3 @ 1
5.5.4 Providing safety and control devices
(recommended)
For machines in explosion-hazard areas
( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).
Avoiding impurities
NOTE
Material damage due to limestone deposits when
using limy seal liquids!
Chipping limestone solids can cause erosional
damage.
 Add water softener or install an ion exchanger.
1. Install the included strainers in the seal liquid
supply line.
2. To monitor impurities, install a differential
pressure gauge with a contact manometer if
necessary.
Avoiding backflow
 Use a check valve in the suction pipe to ensure
that no seal liquid or gas flows back once the
machine is switched off.
Making provisions for isolating and shutting off
the pipes
For maintenance and repair work.
 Provide shut-off devices in the inlet and
discharge pipes.
01/2016 21
Allow measurements of the operating 5.6.3 Installing auxiliary pipes (if available)
conditions
Observe the manufacturer's specifications for
1. Provide manometers for pressure any auxiliary operating systems (e.g.
measurements in the inlet and discharge pipes. mechanical seal supply systems) which are
2. Provide load monitors (overload and underload) present.
on the motor side. 1. Connect the auxiliary pipes to the auxiliary
3. Provide for machine-side temperature connections so that they are stress-free and do
measurements. not leak (→ setup drawing).
4. To measure the seal liquid flow rate, install a 2. Avoid air pockets: Route the pipes with a
direction-dependent flow rate measurement continuous slope up to the machine.
device.
Pos: 47 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Rohrleitungen anschließen @ 8\mod_1344345480623_6.doc @ 64586 @ 233333 @ 1 5.6.4 Installing the inlet pipe

5.6 Connecting the pipe lines 1. Remove the transport and sealing covers from
the machine.
5.6.1 Keeping the pipe lines clean
2. Install the inlet pipe.
3. Ensure no seals extend inwards.
NOTE
5.6.5 Installing the outlet pipe
Risk of damage due to connecting the machine to
pipe line system! 1. Remove the transport and sealing covers from
Welding shot (small pieces of very hard metal) in the machine.
the pipe lines can cause substantial damage to 2. Install the outlet pipe.
the machine.
3. Ensure no seals extend inwards.
 Make sure that the supplied temporary screen Pos: 48 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Kompressorbetrieb: Umgehungsleitung anschließen @ 8\mod_1344345733139_6.doc @ 64605 @ 3 @ 1

across the flange, if present, stays in place when 5.6.6 Compressor operation: connecting the
connecting the machine to the pipe line system. bypass pipe
 Only remove the temporary screen (if present)
 Install a bypass pipe with gate valve to enable
once the inlet pipe is entirely clear, approx. after
3–4 weeks of operation. depressurized machine startup.
Pos: 49 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Spannungsfreien Rohrleitungsanschluss prüfen @ 8\mod_1344345817951_6.doc @ 64624 @ 33 @ 1

 Clean screen periodically while in use. 5.6.7 Checking the stress-free pipe connection

 Piping installed and cooled down

NOTE NOTE
Risk of damage due to impurities in the machine! Material damage due to distorted machine casing!
 Make sure no impurities can enter the machine.  Ensure that all pipes are stress-free when
connected to the machine.
1. Clean all pipes and fittings prior to installation.
2. Ensure no flange seals extend inwards. 1. Disconnect the pipe connecting flanges from the
machine.
3. Remove any blank flanges, plugs, protective
foils, and/or protective paint from the flanges. 2. Check whether the pipes can be moved freely in
all directions within the expected range of
5.6.2 Installing the seal liquid line expansion:
1. Remove the transport and sealing covers from – Nominal diameter < 150 mm (5.9 inch): by
the machine. hand
2. Install the seal liquid line. – Nominal diameter > 150 mm (5.9 inch): with
a small lever
3. Ensure no seals extend inwards.
3. Make sure the flange surfaces are plane-
parallel.
4. Reconnect the pipe connecting flanges to the
machine.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 22

5.6.8 Checking the pipes for leaks 5.10 Checking after assembly
 Perform a leak test for the entire system with the
pipes connected, e.g. a soap bubble test at Further checks may be necessary as per
supplementary instructions or system-specific
0.5 bar overpressure.
Pos: 50 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Elektrisch anschließen @ 8\mod_1344346227217_6.doc @ 64643 @ 23 @ 1
conditions.

5.7 Electrical connection

 Ensure that:
– The drive motor is adjusted correctly and
DANGER
assembled in such a way as to prevent axial
movement.
Risk of electrocution!
– The rotor/shaft assembly can be rotated
 Have all electrical work carried out by qualified without making contact.
electricians only.
– Rotating parts are correctly guarded.
– Pipe systems and fittings have been installed
DANGER in the correct positions, are not distorted,
and have been pressure-tested.
Risk of fatal injury due to rotating parts! – Any heat exchangers have been bled.

 Disconnect the motor from its power supply and – Any pressure booster pumps are ready for
keep it locked when carrying out any installation or operation.
maintenance work. – The separator, if present, is positioned
correctly at the right height and features the
5.7.1 Connecting the motor specified fittings.
Pos: 54 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/UEB_Betrieb @ 8\mod_1344347712936_6.doc @ 64719 @ 1 @ 1

Follow the instructions of the motor

manufacturer.

1. Connect the motor according to the connection

diagram.
2. Make sure no danger arises due to electric
power.
3. Install an EMERGENCY STOP switch.
Pos: 51 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Kupplung feinausrichten @ 8\mod_1344346394217_6.doc @ 64662 @ 2 @ 1

5.8 Fine-adjustment of the

coupling

We recommend having the coupling adjusted

by GD Nash Service.

Pos: 52 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Berührungsschutz montieren @ 8\mod_1344346443045_6.doc @ 64681 @ 2 @ 1

5.9 Installing safety guards

1. Secure moving parts with safety guards as per
DIN EN 294.
2. Do not fasten any temperature-sensitive
components or lines to hot machine parts.
Pos: 53 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Nach Montage prüfen @ 8\mod_1344346689451_6.doc @ 64700 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 23

 3. Install the sealing system ( manufacturer's
6 Operation specifications).
Pos: 55 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Inbetriebnahme vorbereiten @ 8\mod_1344347962026_6.doc @ 64738 @ 233333 @ 1
4. Make sure the parameters required for the
installed sealing system are met.
6.1 Preparations for the initial
5. Ensure that the permissible container pressure
start-up is not exceeded on seal supply systems
( manufacturer's specifications).
This section applies to an empty or dry
machine (i.e. when commissioning or 6.1.5 Filling with seal liquid
recommissioning after longer periods of disuse
or repairs).  Auxiliary operating systems ready for operation
 All lines for pumped fluids and seal liquids have WARNING
been connected correctly.

 All gate valves and valves have been closed. Risk of injury and poisoning due to hazardous
fluids!
6.1.1 Identifying the machine version
 Safely collect any leaking fluids and dispose of
 Identify the machine version ( order data them in accordance with environmental rules and
sheet). requirements.

Machine versions vary. For example, a vacuum

pump or compressor, the type of shaft seal,
differing materials. NOTE

Material damage caused by dry running!

6.1.2 Removing the preservative
 Make sure the machine is filled properly with seal
liquid.
Only necessary for machines treated for
storage.
 Ensure that no pipe connections are leaking.
Pos: 56 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Betriebsflüssigkeitsstand vor dem Anfahren einstellen @ 8\mod_1344348740933_6.doc @ 64757 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.6 Adjusting the seal liquid level before

 ( Chapter 4.5, Page 17).
startup
6.1.3 Lubricating the bearings
The seal liquid level may not be above the shaft
Machines with grease-lubricated antifriction center when starting the machine.
bearings are ready for operation upon delivery.

Machines with automatic discharge

 If the machine was stored for longer than 2 1. Open the seal liquid shut-off fitting.
years: Lubricate bearings again ( Chapter 3.3, The machine's process chamber fills up to
Page 12). overflow level at the outlet flange or welding
neck flange.
6.1.4 Preparing auxiliary systems (if available)
2. Once no more fluid flows from the partial
The manufacturer does not accept any liability discharge flange (welding neck flange), start the
for damage caused by installing or using a machine.
third-party or unapproved auxiliary system.

Seal supply systems

1. Verify that the sealing medium is suitable to mix

(i.e. compatible) with the pumped fluid and the
seal liquid.
2. Identify the sealing system:
– ( order data sheet)

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 24

Machines with adjacent separator
6.1.8 Checking the direction of rotation
 Separator assembled correctly.  Seal liquid level in machine casing is correct.
 Fluid level monitor installed in separator at same  Stuffing boxes are wet.
level as machine.

 Compensation line and extra components  For mechanical seals with external flushing:
Flushing liquid valve opened briefly.
installed below required fluid level.
 Check direction of rotation.
 Overflow, if present, installed in separator at Pos: 59 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/UEB_In Betrieb nehmen @ 8\mod_1344349433574_6.doc @ 64814 @ 2 @ 1

maximum fluid level. 6.2 Start-up

1. Open the shut-off fitting between the machine Pos: 60 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Einschalten - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344349485386_6.doc @ 64833 @ 3 @ 1

and the separator. 6.2.1 Switching on

2. Fill the machine with seal liquid via the
separator.  Machine set up and connected properly
3. Check the fluid level via the fluid level monitor or  Motor set up and connected properly
via fluid discharge at overflow.
 Motor exactly aligned with the machine
4. Once the correct fluid level has been reached,
start the machine.  All connections stress-free and sealed
 Any available auxiliary systems are ready for
Pos: 57 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Sperrflüssigkeit für Wellendichtung einstellen @ 8\mod_1344348917230_6.doc @ 64776 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.7 Adjusting the shaft seal's flushing liquid

operation
For stuffing boxes with internal flushing:
 All safety equipment installed and tested for
functionality
The stuffing box must always leak slightly to
dissipate the frictional heat and to provide  Machine prepared properly
lubrication.
Larger leaks in the initial hours of operation  Machine filled with seal liquid up to shaft center
lessen during the running-in period.
 Shaft seal humidified
 Make sure that sufficient seepage fluid is
discharged:
DANGER
– Vacuum pumps: 1-2 drops per second Risk of injury due to running machine!
– Compressors: Continuous dripping up to
 Do not touch the machine while operating.
slight, steady flow
For stuffing boxes with external flushing:  Ensure that the coupling guard is attached.

 Do not carry out any work on the running

1. Open the flushing liquid valves for gland packing
machine.
flushing.
2. Set the supply pressure in accordance with the  Allow the machine to cool down completely before
starting any work.
operating point.
3. Make sure that sufficient liquid is discharged to
provide for gland packing cooling later.
DANGER
– Vacuum pumps: 1-2 drops per second
– Compressors: Continuous dripping up to Risk of injury and poisoning due to expulsion of
slight, steady flow pumped fluids and seal liquids!
For mechanical seals:  Use personal protective equipment when carrying
out any work on the machine.
 Open the flushing liquid valve for a few seconds
to humidify the mechanical seals.
Pos: 58 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Drehrichtung prüfen @ 8\mod_1344349140371_6.doc @ 64795 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 25

 8. For stuffing boxes with internal flushing:
NOTE Slight dripping is necessary. Check setting and
correct if necessary.
Material damage caused by dry running!
9. For stuffing boxes with external flushing:
 Make sure the machine is filled properly with seal Adjust the required flushing liquid pressure/flow
liquid. using the flushing liquid valve.
 Adjust the seal liquid level immediately before 10. For mechanical seals with external flushing:
startup ( Chapter 6.1.6, Page 24). ( Chapter 1.2, Page 6)
11. Open the discharge line valve.
12. Close the bypass line's valve.
NOTE
13. Re-adjust the seal liquid valve and the flushing
Risk of cavitation when throttling down the liquid valve if necessary.
suction flow rate!
Pos: 62 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Pumpenbetrieb anfahren @ 8\mod_1344349904918_6.doc @ 64871 @ @ 1

Pump operation: startup

 Always keep the inlet-side fitting fully open and do
not use it to adjust the flow rate. We recommend having the machine
commissioned by GD Nash Service.

NOTE
1. Open the inlet pipe’s valve.

Material damage if maximum compression 2. For shaft seal with external flushing:
pressure is exceeded! Open the flushing liquid valve.

 Do not operate the machine for long periods with 3. Switch on drive motor.
the discharge-side or inlet-side fitting closed. After switching on: Immediately open the seal
liquid valve.
Pos: 61 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Kompressorbetrieb anfahren @ 8\mod_1344349761668_6.doc @ 64852 @ @ 1
4. Adjust the seal liquid valve:
Compressor operation: startup
– With flow rate measurement device: Open
We recommend having the machine the seal liquid valve until the flow rate
commissioned by GD Nash Service. measurement device shows the required
value ( Chapter 9.2.9, Page 53). Correct
the mass flow again once the final intake
pressure has been reached.
Start up the machine without backpressure. – With pressure gauge: Adjust the seal liquid
valve so that the pressure gauge shows
approximately 1.0 bar absolute during
startup.
1. Close the gate valves of the discharge line and 5. For stuffing boxes with internal flushing:
the inlet pipe. Slight dripping is necessary. Check setting and
2. Open the bypass line's gate valve. correct if necessary.
3. For shaft seal with external flushing: 6. For stuffing boxes with external flushing: Adjust
Open the flushing liquid valve. the required flushing liquid pressure/flow using
the flushing liquid valve.
4. Switch on drive motor.
After switching on: Immediately open the seal 7. For mechanical seals with external flushing:
liquid valve. ( Chapter 1.2, Page 6)
Pos: 63 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Betrieb kontrollieren @ 8\mod_1344350693761_6.doc @ 64890 @ 3 @ 1

5. Open the inlet pipe’s valve.

6. Adjust the seal liquid valve using a flow rate
measurement device ( Chapter 9.2.9,
Page 53).
7. Throttle down the gate valve of the bypass line
until the desired operating pressure is reached.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 26

6.2.2 Checking operation 6.3 Shutting down the pump
Proper operation must be checked immediately
after the initial commissioning and
 Machine switched off and depressurized
subsequently at regular intervals.
WARNING
1. Read and document pressure values and mass- Risk of injury and poisoning due to hazardous
flow rates set after commissioning. fluids!
2. Monitor and document the temperatures of the  Safely collect any leaking fluids and dispose of
fluids (seal liquid and flushing liquid) and them in accordance with environmental rules and
components (bearings, shaft seal) until steady- requirements.
state is reached.
3. In the case of cavitation risk: Monitor machine  Take the following measures whenever the
for rattling and crackling noises. pump is shut down:

4. If irregularities are observed, identify and Machine is to be Measure

eliminate causes ( Chapter 8, Page 35).  Perform measures
Pos: 64 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Ausschalten - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344350761089_6.doc @ 64909 @ 3 @ 1
...shut down for a
prolonged period appropriate for the seal
6.2.3 Switching off
liquid.

...drained  Close the inlet-side and

WARNING discharge-side fittings.

Risk of injury due to hot machine parts! ...disassembled  Isolate the motor from its
power supply and secure it
 Use personal protective equipment when carrying
out any work on the machine. against unauthorized
switch-on.
Pos: 65 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Kompressorbetrieb ausschalten @ 8\mod_1344350890871_6.doc @ 64928 @ @ 1

...put into storage  Follow the storage

Compressor mode: switching off instructions ( Chapter 4.4,
Page 17).
1. Slowly open the bypass line's valve.
2. Close the pressure line's valve. Table 7 Measures to be taken if the machine is
3. After about 1 minute, close the inlet pipe's valve. shut down
4. Switch off the drive motor.
5. Close the seal liquid valve.
6. Close the flushing liquid valve.
7. Close the bypass line's valve.
Pos: 66 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Pumpenbetrieb ausschalten @ 8\mod_1344350947027_6.doc @ 64947 @ @ 1

Pump mode: switching off

1. Switch off the drive motor.

2. Close the seal liquid valve.
3. Close the flushing liquid valve.
4. Close the inlet pipe's valve.
Pos: 67 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Außer Betrieb nehmen @ 8\mod_1344351021058_6.doc @ 64966 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 27

Seal liquid Duration of shutdown Draining when there is a risk of freezing
properties (depending on process) 1. Open the discharge valve to drain fluids from the
Short Long machines, separators and lines.
Solidifying  Flush the  Flush the 2. Safely collect any fluids and dispose of them in
sediment machine. machine. accordance with environmental rules and
 Heat up or  Drain the requirements.
Solidifying/
freezing, non- drain the machine. 3. On depressurized machines, remove the full-
corrosive machine. draining plug in the head or port plates.

Solidifying/  Heat up or  Drain the 4. Safely collect any fluids and dispose of them in
freezing, drain the machine. accordance with environmental rules and
corrosive machine.  Flush the requirements.
machine with 5. For mechanical seals: Fully drain all fluids from
preservative. all seal housings.
 Dry machine 6. Safely collect any fluids and dispose of them in
and turn rotor accordance with environmental rules and
every requirements.
2 weeks.
Pos: 68 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Wieder in Betrieb nehmen @ 8\mod_1344351664527_6.doc @ 64985 @ 2 @ 1

6.4 Start-up following a shutdown

Remains liquid, – –
non-corrosive period
Remains liquid, –  Drain the
1. If the machine has been shut down for > 1 year,
corrosive machine.
lubricate the bearings before recommissioning
 Flush the the machine.
machine with
2. Carry out all steps as for the initial
preservative.
commissioning ( Chapter 5.10, Page 23,
 Dry machine Chapter 6.2, Page 25).
and turn rotor Pos: 69 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Wartung und Instandhaltung - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344351939270_6.doc @ 65004 @ 1 @ 1

every
2 weeks.

Table 8 Shutdown measures depending on the

seal liquid properties

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 28

  For trouble-free operation, always ensure the
7 Maintenance following:
– No dry running
For machines in explosion-hazard areas – No leaks
( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).
– No cavitation
– Unclogged and clean filters
– No unusual running noises or vibrations
Trained service technicians are available for – No excessive leakage at the shaft seal
fitting and repair work. Present a pumped
medium certificate when requesting service – Check the stuffing box settings. If the stuffing
( Chapter 9.3, Page 59). box glands can no longer be re-adjusted
Pos: 70 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Überwachen @ 8\mod_1344352043141_6.doc @ 65023 @ 2 @ 1
after longer periods of operation, replace the
gland packing ( Chapter 7.1.5, Page 31).
7.1 Inspections Pos: 71 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Inspektion @ 8\mod_1344352245065_6.doc @ 65042 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.1 Inspection
The recommended intervals assume
malfunction-free operation. Perform a first general inspection approx. 150
In the event of malfunctions, the corresponding operating hours after initial commissioning of
inspections or revisions should be performed the machine.
immediately. Perform a first inspection of the belt drive after
approx. 5 operating hours.

The inspection intervals depend on the Perform the following during the inspection:
operational conditions of the machine. 1. Make sure that the pumped fluid and seal liquid
do not display significant contamination.
2. Make sure that the specified technical data is
observed (power consumption, temperatures
DANGER etc.).
3. Ensure that no leaks are present (exception:
Risk of injury due to running machine!
necessary leaks at the stuffing boxes).
 Do not touch the machine while it is running. 4. Check that the smooth running of the machine
 Do not carry out any work on the running and the bearings' running noises have not
machine. deteriorated.
5. Check the foundation for sink marks and cracks.
6. Make sure that the valves, filters, and screens
WARNING are free of foreign matter. Clean if necessary.
7. Check pipes, fittings, and containers for
Risk of injury and poisoning due to hazardous strength, leaks, and secure fit.
pumped fluids!
8. Check connecting elements and re-tighten if
 Use personal protective equipment when carrying necessary.
out any work on the machine.
9. Check the safety system.
10. For belt drives: Check belt pre-tensioning and
correct if necessary.
11. Immediately eliminate any identified
impermissible deviations and modifications.
12. Schedule appointment for reinspection based on
soiling and wear.
Pos: 72 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Revision @ 8\mod_1344352543779_6.doc @ 65061 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 29

7.1.2 Reinspection

Under favorable operating conditions,

reinspections are subject to the same intervals
applicable for lubrication or grease changes
( Chapter 7.1.3, Page 30).
1. Perform inspection ( Chapter 7.1.1, Page 29)
durchführen.
2. Check that the impeller's alignment lies within
the permissible tolerance range.
3. Make sure that all fastening bolts have been Fig. 7 Assembly washer
securely tightened (except for stuffing boxes).
Pos: 73 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Wälzlager mit Fettschmierung @ 8\mod_1346396130591_6.doc @ 69181 @ 3 @ 1

5. For internal shaft seal rings:

7.1.3 Antifriction bearings lubricated with Install the V-ring according to the specifications
grease in Chapter 9.1.6, Page 43.
Pos: 74 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Gleitringdichtungen @ 8\mod_1344353085503_6.doc @ 65118 @ 3 @ 1

Grease to be used ( Chapter 9.2.11, 7.1.4 Mechanical seals

Page 57).
 Observe additional instructions ( Chapter 1.2,
Page 6).
Pos: 75 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Stopfbuchspackungen @ 8\mod_1344409004970_6.doc @ 65141 @ 3 @ 1

The temperature of the bearings can increase

considerably after relubrication, however, after
a running-in phase it must sink down to the
normal value.

Lubricating with the relubrication system

1. Clean lubrication nipple.
2. Apply the specified quantity of grease with the
grease gun.
Turn the shaft uniformly while doing this.

If no relubrication systems (lubrication nipples) are

available, proceed as follows:
1. Fill the bearings’ cavities completely with
lubricating grease.
Leave out the bearing covers to prevent
excessive greasing.
2. Disassemble the axial shaft sealing rings (V-
rings).
3. Grease the V-rings’ sliding surfaces.
4. For external shaft seal rings:
Install V-ring so that the front side of the bearing
cover is flush with the V-ring’s outer edge. Use
assembly washers if necessary.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 30

 Inserting a new gland packing
7.1.5 Stuffing boxes

We recommend having replacement and re-

adjustment of the gland packing performed by
GD Nash Service.

Disassembly of the gland packing

Fig. 8 Removing the packing rings

1 Packing ring
2 Packing extractor
10 Lantern gland
1. Push spray ring or V-ring away from stuffing box
seal.
2. Remove the stuffing box gland’s fastening bolts
and/or nuts.
3. For single-piece glands: Push the gland as far
away as possible from the sealing chamber.
4. For two-piece glands: Loosen both parts and
remove them from the shaft.
5. Screw the packing extractor into the packing
ring.
6. Pull the packing ring out of the sealing chamber.

Fig. 9 Extractor for lantern gland (3.2 mm

Fig. 10 Inserting a new gland packing
(1/8 in.) wire)
1 Packing rings
7. Insert two extractors into the sealing chamber.
2 Inlet channel to the lantern gland
Twist the extractor in between the packing rings
so that the bent ends latch into the two opposite 3 Packing stuffers
positions. 10 Lantern gland (if provided)
102 Head or Endschield on drive end
8. Pull the lantern gland out of the sealing
103 Head or Endschield on non-
chamber.
drive end
9. Remove the remaining packing rings using the
102-1/103-1 Stud bolts & nuts or bolts on
packing extractor.
drive end/non-drive end side
10. Thoroughly clean the packing chamber. 111 Shaft
112 Stuffing box gland

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 31

 7.1.6 Cleaning the machine
View F is shown at a 90° angle to present the
gland locking bolts and nuts.
2 and 10 only where used. CAUTION

1. Produce packing stuffers 3 from two strips of Risk of injury when cleaning with compressed air!
hard rubber. The stuffers need to fit between the  Make sure a suitable extraction system is
shaft and the packing chamber’s inner wall. employed.
2. Apply Molykote G-N paste or a similar lubricant
 Use personal protective equipment.
to the packing rings’ inner surface.
3. Open the packing rings to form a spiral by
offsetting the two ends axially ( A).
NOTE
4. Fit the packing ring around the shaft and insert it
into the sealing chamber ( B). Material damage due to unsuitable cleaning
5. Push the packing ring into the packing chamber agents!
using the packing stuffers.  Make sure the cleaning agents are compatible
Ensure that the packing ring lies flush against with the machine.
the packing chamber's front facing ( C).
6. Install the packing rings so that their joining
points are offset by 180° ( D). Schedule cleaning at intervals in accordance
with the level of soiling determined during the
7. Insert the lantern gland, if included ( D).
first inspection.
8. Install the remaining packing rings ( E).
When doing so, make sure that:
1. To flush accumulated foreign matter out of the
– The joining points are offset by 180°. ring of liquid, open the drain pipe valves.
– The packing rings are installed tightly and 2. Alternatively: Remove the full-draining plugs.
evenly.
3. Flush the machine with water.
9. For two-piece glands:
4. Clean or replace the strainers and filters in the
Fit the two-piece gland around the shaft and
pipes.
connect the nuts, washers, bolts ( F). Push
When doing so, make sure that no debris falls
the gland onto the shaft and any locking bolts
into the machine from the strainers of filters.
until it is flush with the last packing ring.
10. For single-piece glands: Removing lime deposits
Push the gland onto the shaft and any locking
bolts until it is flush with the last packing ring. Intervals for removing lime deposits depend on
the lime content of the seal liquid and must be
11. Tighten the gland locking bolts or nuts by hand. > 6 months.
12. Start up machine ( Chapter 6.2.1, Page 25). We recommend having the descaling
During operation, monitor the temperature and performed by GD Nash Service.
leaks around the sealing chamber.
1. Flush the machine with a suitable solvent
13. If required, adjust packing when machine is
( Chapter 9.2.12, Page 57).
stopped. To do this, switch off the machine,
disassemble the safety guard, adjust packing, 2. Flush the machine with water.
Pos: 77 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Demontieren @ 8\mod_1344410411210_6.doc @ 65179 @ 233 @ 1

replace safety guard and restart the machine.

14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 until the specified
leakage amount is reached ( Chapter 6.1.7,
Page 25).
Pos: 76 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Maschine reinigen @ 8\mod_1344410121283_6.doc @ 65160 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 32

7.2 Disassembly
GD Nash can accept no liability if the machine
is disassembled incorrectly.
DANGER
Risk of injury due to running machine!
 Do not touch the machine while it is running.
 Do not carry out any work on the running
machine.
 Disconnect the motor from its power supply and
keep it locked when carrying out any installation or
maintenance work.
DANGER
Risk of electrocution!
 Have all electrical work carried out by qualified
electricians only.
WARNING
Risk of injury and poisoning due to hazardous
pumped fluids!
 Use personal protective equipment when carrying
out any work on the machine.
 Allow the machine to cool down completely before
commencing any work.
 Make sure the machine is depressurized.
 Drain the machine, safely collect the pumped
liquid, and dispose of it in accordance with
environmental regulations.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to heavy components!
 Be aware of the weight of components. Lift and
transport heavy components using suitable lifting
gear.
 Set down components safely and secure them
against overturning and rolling away.
Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72.
WARNING
Risk of injury during disassembly!
 Secure the discharge-side valve against
accidental opening.
 Depressurize the seal supply system, if included.
 Wear protective gloves as components can
become very sharp due to wear or damage.
 Remove spring-loaded components carefully (e.g.
mechanical seals, tensioned bearings, valves
etc.), as components can be ejected by the spring
tension.
 Observe the manufacturer’s specifications (e.g. for
the motor, coupling, mechanical seal, seal supply
system, drive shaft, drives, belt drive).
7.2.1 Returning the machine to the
manufacturer
 Machine depressurized
 Machine fully drained
 Electrical connections disconnected and motor
secured against being switched on again
 Machine cold
 Coupling guard removed
 Auxiliary systems shut down, depressurized,
and drained
 Pressure gauge lines, pressure gauge, and
brackets disassembled
 Enclose an accurate and fully completed safety
certificate when returning machines or
components to GD Nash ( Chapter 9.3,
Page 59).
01/2016 33
7.2.2 Preparations for disassembly NOTE
 Machine depressurized Material damage due to unsuitable components!
 Machine fully drained, flushed, and  Always replace lost or damaged screws with
decontaminated screws of the same strength ( Chapter 9.2.4,
Page 51).
 Electrical connections disconnected and motor
secured against being switched on again  Only replace seals with seals of the same
material.
 Machine cold
 Coupling guard removed
1. Observe the following during assembly:
 Auxiliary systems shut down, depressurized, – Replace worn parts with genuine spare
and drained
parts.
 Pressure gauge lines, pressure gauge, and – Replace seals. Take care that the seal is
fittings disassembled seated correctly.
 Observe the following during removal: – Maintain the prescribed tightening torques
– Mark the precise orientation and position of ( Chapter 9.2.4, Page 51).
all components before disassembling them. 2. Clean all parts ( Chapter 9.2.12, Page 57). Do
– Disassemble components concentrically not remove any markings when doing so.
without canting. 3. Reassemble the machine ( Chapter 9.1.2,
– Disassemble machine ( Chapter 9.1.2, Page 41).
Page 41). 4. Replace antifriction bearings and grease them
Pos: 78 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Montieren @ 8\mod_1344410703145_6.doc @ 65198 @ 2 @ 1

( Chapter 7.1.3, Page 30).

7.3 Assembly
5. Install the machine in the system ( Chapter 5,
Page 18).
Reinstall the components concentrically, Pos: 79 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Ersatzteile bestellen @ 8\mod_1344411271176_6.doc @ 65236 @ 2 @ 1

without canting, in accordance with the marks

applied. 7.4 Ordering spare parts
GD Nash can accept no liability if the machine
is assembled incorrectly. GD Nash can accept no liability if parts other
than genuine parts are used.

WARNING

Risk of injury due to heavy components!

Repairs are performed by GD Nash Service.
 Be aware of the weight of components. Lift and
transport heavy components using suitable lifting
gear.
 Have the following information ready at hand
when ordering spare parts:
WARNING – Spare part order number as per spare parts
list ( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).
Risk of injury during assembly!  If no spare parts list is available, have the
Components may be ejected through spring following information from the type plate ready
tension. at hand:
 Take care when installing components with – Machine type ( Chapter 3.1.1, Page 11)
springs (e.g. mechanical seals, pretensioned
bearings, valves). – Machine's serial number ( Chapter 3.1.1,
Page 11)
 Observe the manufacturer’s specifications (e.g. for
– Machine's year of construction
the motor, coupling, mechanical seal, seal supply
systems, drive shaft, drives, belt drive). ( Chapter 3.1.1, Page 11)
– Part number as per drawing
( Chapter 9.1.2, Page 41)

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 34

8 Troubleshooting Pos: 82 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

If malfunctions occur which are not specified in the

following table or cannot be traced back to the
specified causes, please consult GD Nash.
Possible malfunctions are identified by a number in
the following table. This number identifies the
respective cause and remedy in the troubleshooting
list.
Pos: 81 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/08 Störungsbehebung/Zuordnung Störung/Nummer @ 8\mod_1344411865955_6.doc @ 65274 @ @ 1

Fault Number
Rough operation 1
Excessive power consumption 2
Flow rate too low 3
Housing too hot 4
Bearings too hot 5
Bearings whining 6
Bearings rattling 7
Vacuum not achieved 8
Motor will not start 9
Main circuit breaker activating 10

Table 9 Fault/number assignment

Pos: 83 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/08 Störungsbehebung/Störungstabelle @ 8\mod_1344411986316_6.doc @ 65293 @ @ 1

Fault number Cause Remedy

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

X – – – – – – – – – Base plate vibrating  Fill base plate and any gear base
with foundation concrete or dry sand.

X – – – – – – – – – Pump assembly vibrating  Check assembly's alignment and

fastening.

X – – – – – – – – – Pipes vibrating  Check the fastenings of the pipes.

X – – – – – – – – – Cavitation – rattling  Use colder seal liquid. If necessary,

noise also reduce the inlet pressure by
adding secondary air or retrofit
cavitation protection.

X X – – – – – – – – Pulsing flow  Throttle down seal liquid until pulsing

is eliminated, inspect check valves.

X X – – – – – – – – Excessive liquid at  Throttle down seal liquid, if

suction end necessary install upstream separator
at suction end.

X X – – – – – – – – Separator level too high  Install separator at lower level.

X X – – – – – – – – Rotor touches cone or  Open inspection cover, check gap

port plate adjustment and correct if necessary.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 35

Fault number Cause Remedy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

– X – – – – – – – – Stuffing box bolted too  Vacuum pump: Loosen gland far

tightly enough to allow leakage of 1-2 drops
per second.
 Compressor: Loosen gland far
enough to allow flushing liquid to
escape in a continuous drip or a
steady flow.

– X – – – – – – – – High amount of solids  Periodically or continuously flush

accumulating at suction housing, install dirt trap if necessary.
end
– X – – – – – – – – Rotor jammed  Loosen housing bolts, turn rotor by
lever, if necessary clean vacuum
pump or compressor.

– X – – – – – – – – Motor protection  If malfunctions of the vacuum pump

activating or compressor can be ruled out,
check motor protection and/or motor
size.

– X – – – – – – – – Erosion in housing  Replace housing, if necessary install

lining, check chemical resistance of
the material, if necessary filter seal
liquid.

– X – – – – – – – – Fluctuating power  Check seal liquid flow rate.

consumption  Inspect check valve/fittings.
 In the case of excessive pumping of
liquid via the inlet pipe: Install a
separator in the inlet pipe.

– X X – – – – – – – Excessive compression  Check system, if necessary correct

inlet or discharge pressure.

– X X – – – – – – – Lime or other deposits  Descale machine ( Chapter 9.2.12,

Page 57).
 If necessary disassemble and clean
machine.
 Add softener to seal liquid.

– X X – – – – – – – Measurement devices  Check measurement devices,

display incorrect calibrate if necessary.
information
– X X – – – – – – – Excessive discharge  Check system.
pressure
– X X – – – – – – – Maximum permissible  Eliminate unnecessary throttling (e.g.
pressure difference closed lines, incorrectly adjusted gate
exceeded valves) at inlet and discharge ends.

– – X – – – – – – – Excessive clearance  Open hand aperture cover if one is

losses available.
 Check impeller gap and play.
 Correct the length of the housing.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 36

Fault number Cause Remedy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

– – X – – – – – – – Inlet pressure too low  Check system, if necessary increase

inlet pressure.

– – X – – – – – – – Internal leaks  Disassemble vacuum pump or

compressor, check chemical
resistance of the material, install new
parts if corroded.

– – X – – – – – – – Port plate valve plates  Replace valve plates.

faulty
– – X – – – – – – – Suction end leaking  Check gaskets on inlet flange and
suction-end inspection cover, replace
if necessary.

– – X – – – – – – – Stuffing box leaking  Vacuum pump: Tighten gland far

enough to allow leakage of 1-2 drops
per second.
 Compressor: Tighten gland far
enough to allow flushing liquid to
escape in a continuous drip or a
steady flow.

– – X X – – – – – – Not enough seal liquid  Increase seal liquid flow rate or

pressure.

– – X X – – – – – – Excessive seal liquid  Reduce temperature or increase seal

temperature liquid level.

– – – – X – – – – – Too much grease on  Remove excess grease.

bearing
– – – – X – – – – – Coupling exerting  Correct machine alignment.
pressure
– – – – X – – – – – Belt tension too high  Reduce belt tension.

– – – – X – – – – – Bearing soiled  Clean or replace bearing. Check

seals.

– – – – X – – – – – Ambient temperature  Use high-temperature grease.

above limit value
– – – – X X – – – – Insufficient lubrication  Lubricate as specified.

– – – – X X – – – – Bearing corroded  Replace bearing, check seals.

– – – – – – X – – – Flaking in the bearings'  Replace bearings.

races
– – – – – – X – – – Score marks in the  Replace bearings, avoid jarring at
bearings' races standstill.

– – – – – – – X – – No seal liquid supply  Check seal liquid inlet pipe.

– – – – – – – X – – Air ingress to system  Check all connections and seals and

re-tighten if necessary.

– – – – – – – X – – Incorrect direction of  Reverse direction of rotation by

rotation reversing electrical connections.

– – – – – – – X – – Wear in internal machine  Disassemble the machine and

parts replace damaged parts.

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 37

 Fault number Cause Remedy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

– – – – – – – X – – Discharge-end valves  Replace valves.

faulty
– – – – – – – – X – One or more open  Check fuses, terminal clamps, and
circuits cables.

– – – – – – – – X – Impeller jammed  Disassemble machine.

 Drain, descale, and clean machine.
 Assemble machine.
 Check and adjust gap between
impeller, rotor, and housing.

– – – – – – – – – X Short circuit in motor coil  Check motor coil.

– – – – – – – – – X Motor overloaded  Reduce seal liquid flow rate.

– – – – – – – – – X Excessive  Reduce counterpressure.

counterpressure at outlet
flange
– – – – – – – – – X Seal liquid flow rate too  Reduce seal liquid flow rate.
high

Table 10 Troubleshooting list

Pos: 84 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1
Pos: 85 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/UEB_Anhang @ 8\mod_1344413522427_6.doc @ 65312 @ 1 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 38

 Part no. Designation
9 Appendix 37.01 3)
Retainer plate
Pos: 86 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Teile-Nr. und Benennungen @ 8\mod_1344495708584_6.doc @ 65970 @ 23 @ 1
3)
37.02 Valve plate
9.1 Drawings 37.03 3)
Threaded spacer bolt
3)
37.04 Hexagon nut
9.1.1 Spare parts list
40.01 Endshield
Part no. Designation
40.02 Inspection cover
10.01 Impeller
40.06 Blank flange, access to “increased flow
10.02 Shaft rate of the seal liquid” (“enhanced
10.03 Shaft key, DIN 6885 cooling”)

15.01 Stuffing box gland 40.07 Gasket

**)
15.02 Lantern gland 40.10 Blank flange (suction side, bottom)
**)
15.03 Gland packing 40.12 Blank flange (discharge side, top)

15.04 Hexagon head bolt 40.13 Gasket

15.05 Washer 40.14 Hexagon head bolt

15.06 Plug for shaft seal with external flushing 40.15 Hexagon head bolt

15.07 PTFE sealing tape 40.16 Hexagon head bolt

20.00 Mechanical seal assembly 40.17 Hexagon nut

22.01 Shaft sleeve 40.18 Plug

22.02 Shaft key 40.19 Plug for “enhanced cooling”, refrigerant

circuit
22.03 O-ring
40.20 Full-draining plugs
22.04 Hexagon socket head cap screw
40.21 Plug allowing pressure gauges to be
22.07 Sealing material for assembly connected
22.08 Sealing material with lubricating paste 40.22 Plug (on both sides) for shaft seal with
for assembly internal flushing (removal of the flushing
30.01 Port plate, drive-end liquid from the interior of the machine) or
lobe purge.
30.02 Port plate, non-drive-end
40.23 Sealing material for assembly
30.03 Hexagon socket head cap screw
40.24 PTFE sealing tape
30.04 Spring dowel
1)
48.01 Blank flange for partial discharge
30.05 Spring dowel
1)
48.02 Weld neck flange
30.06 Sealing material for assembly
1)
48.03 Hexagon head bolt
30.09 Hexagon socket head cap screw
1)
48.04 Hexagon nut
30.10 Reducer plug
1)
48.05 Gasket
30.11 2) O-ring
50.01 Bearing housing, drive-end
30.13 *) Plug
50.02 Bearing housing, non-drive-end
30.14 *) Plug
50.03 Bearing cover, drive-end, internal
35.01*) Housing with/without partition
50.04 Bearing cover, non-drive-end, internal
35.02 Tie rod
50.05 Bearing cover, drive-end, external
35.03 Hexagon nut
50.06 Bearing cover, non-drive-end, external
35.04 Washer
50.07 Centrifugal disc
35.05 Sealing material for assembly
50.08 Roller bearing
35.06 2) O-ring

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 39

 Part no. Designation Pos: 87 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

50.09 Roller bearing

50.10 Radial shaft seal ring, internal
50.11 Radial shaft seal ring, external
50.12 Hexagon head bolt
50.13 Hexagon head bolt
50.14 Hexagon socket head cap screw
50.15 Grub screw
50.16 Flat lubrication nipple
50.17 Balance disc
50.25 Sealing material for assembly
50.28 Plug
50.29 V-ring

Table 11 Designation of components according to

part numbers
1)
For version with partial discharge
connection
2)
For seal with O-rings
3)
For version as vacuum pump
*)
Depending on the version
**)
Depending on the position of the gas inlet
and outlet
Pos: 88 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Explosionszeichnungen @ 8\mod_1344585239591_6.doc @ 66381 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 40

9.1.2 Exploded drawings

Fig. 11 Exploded view of vacuum pump 2BE3/4 (delivered version may differ)
Pos: 89 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Abmessungen @ 8\mod_1344493843447_6.doc @ 65931 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 41

9.1.3 Dimensions

The main connection dimensions for the

machine can be taken from the separate
dimension drawing ( Chapter 1.2, Page 6).

D N N4.21 D
1

øD
H
A B C

Fig. 12 Main dimensions

1 Welding neck flange for partial discharge (N4.21); nominal diameter DN 50 [2"]
Variations of circuit for partial discharge ( Chapter 9.1.7, Page 46)

Type A B C E H ∅ D
2BE3/4
[mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.]

30. 490 19.3 892 35.1 541 21.3 1041 41.0 429.5 16.9 60.3 2⅜
32. 490 19.3 1128 44.4 541 21.3 1041 41.0 429.5 16.9 60.3 2⅜
40. 594 23.4 1169 46.0 689 27.1 1349 53.1 560 22.0 60.3 2⅜
42. 594 23.4 1458 57.4 689 27.1 1349 53.1 560 22.0 60.3 2⅜
50. 672 26.5 1568 61.7 819 32.2 1609 63.3 698 27.5 60.3 2⅜
52. 672 26.5 1818 71.6 819 32.2 1609 63.3 698 27.5 60.3 2⅜
60. 650 25.6 1843 72.6 944 37.2 1859 73.2 809 31.9 60.3 2⅜
62. 650 25.6 2138 84.2 944 37.2 1859 73.2 809 31.9 60.3 2⅜
67. 733 28.9 2280 89.8 1004 39.5 1984 78.1 877 34.5 60.3 2⅜
72. 722 28.4 2500 98.4 1094 43.1 2164 85.2 952 37.5 60.3 2⅜

Table 12 Main dimension

Pos: 90 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1
Pos: 91 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Schnittbild Montage-Hilfsscheibe @ 8\mod_1344414117287_6.doc @ 65369 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 42

9.1.4 Assembly washer cross-section 9.1.6 Sectional drawings of bearing carriers
50.08
50.01 50.17 50.15

50.12
10 mm
50.14 / 50.18 [0.394"]
50.07

Fig. 13 Assembly washer

Pos: 92 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schnittbild Stopfbuchse @ 8\mod_1344590765294_6.doc @ 66441 @ 3 @ 1

9.1.5 Sectional drawing of stuffing box

50.10
50.09
15.03 15.02 15.03 15.06 / 15.07
50.05 50.29
15.01 50.11 50.03

50.28 50.13 40.01

Fig. 15 Bearing carrier on drive-end, 2BE3

40.01 Endshield
50.01 Bearing housing, drive-end
50.03 Bearing cover, drive-end, internal
50.05 Bearing cover, drive-end, external
50.07 Centrifugal disc
50.08 Tapered roller bearing
50.09 Axial shaft seal ring, internal
50.10 Axial shaft seal ring, external
50.11 Hexagon head bolt
15.04
50.12 Hexagon socket head cap screw
50.13 Hexagon head bolt
15.05
22.01 40.01 (1) 50.14 Grub screw
50.15 Flat lubrication nipple
Fig. 14 Stuffing box 50.17 Lubricating grease
50.18 Thread-locking fluid, released as
15.01 Stuffing box flange
normal
15.02 Lantern gland
50.28 Plug
15.03 Gland packing
50.29 Felt ring
15.04 Hexagon head bolt for adjustment
15.05 Washer
15.06 Plug for shaft seal with external
flushing
15.07 PTFE sealing tape
22.01 Shaft sleeve
40.01 Endshield
(1) Removal thread, located in the lantern
gland on the atmospheric side
Pos: 93 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schnittbilder Lagereinsätze @ 8\mod_1344591007780_6.doc @ 66460 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 43

 50.08
40.01 50.15 50.17 50.02

50.12
10 mm
[0.394"] 50.14 / 50.18

50.07

1 WE
50.06

2 WE

50.10
50.09

50.29
50.06
50.04
50.28

Fig. 16 Bearing carrier on drive-end, 2BE4

50.16 50.13 50.11
40.01 Endshield
50.01 Bearing housing, drive-end
Fig. 17 Bearing carrier on non-drive-end, 2BE3
50.03 Bearing cover, drive-end, internal
50.05 Bearing cover, drive-end, external 40.01 Endshield
50.07 Centrifugal disc 50.02 Bearing housing, non-drive-end
50.08 Cylindrical roller bearing, NU type 50.04 Bearing cover, non-drive-end, internal
50.10 Axial shaft seal ring, internal 50.06 Bearing cover, non-drive-end, external
50.11 Axial shaft seal ring, external 50.07 Centrifugal disc
50.12 Hexagon head bolt, bearing cover 50.08 Tapered roller bearing
50.13 Hexagon head bolt, bearing housing 50.09 Axial shaft seal ring, internal
50.14 Socket head cap screw, bearing 50.10 Axial shaft seal ring, external
housing 50.11 Hexagon head bolt
50.15 Grub screw 50.12 Hexagon socket head cap screw
50.16 Flat lubrication nipple 50.13 Hexagon head bolt
50.18 Lubricating grease 50.14 Grub screw
50.19 Thread-locking fluid, released as 50.15 Flat lubrication nipple
normal 50.16 Balance disc
50.24 Sealing material, bearing cover 50.17 Lubricating grease
50.28 Plug 50.18 Thread-locking fluid, released as
50.29 Oil thrower normal
50.30 Molykote paste 50.28 Plug
50.31 Anti-corrosion agent, shaft seal rings 50.29 Felt ring
1WE Version with one shaft end (no shaft
end on non-drive-end)
2WE Version with two shaft ends (second
shaft end on non-drive-end)

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 44

 50.14 Socket head cap screw, bearing
housing
50.15 Grub screw
50.16 Flat lubrication nipple
50.17 Balance disc
50.18 Lubricating grease
50.19 Thread-locking fluid, released as
normal
50.20 Shaft protection cap
50.21 Hexagon head bolt, shaft protection
cap
50.24 Sealing material, bearing cover
50.28 Plug
50.29 Oil thrower
50.30 Molykote paste
50.31 Anti-corrosion agent, shaft seal rings
1WE Version with one shaft end (no shaft
end on non-drive-end)
2WE Version with two shaft ends (second
shaft end on non-drive-end)
Fig. 18 Bearing carrier on non-drive-end, 2BE4 Thread in hole for connecting pipe for draining
40.01 Endshield old grease (part no. 50.28)
50.02 Bearing housing, non-drive-end
Type 2BE3/4 ... Pipe thread according
50.04 Bearing cover, non-drive-end, internal to ISO 7/1
50.06 Bearing cover, non-drive-end, external
30. ... 42. Rp ¼
50.07 Centrifugal disc
50.09 Cylindrical roller bearing, NUP type 50. ... 72. Rp ½
50.10 Axial shaft seal ring, internal
Table 13 Connection threads for pipe for draining
50.11 Axial shaft seal ring, external
old grease
50.12 Hexagon head bolt, bearing cover Pos: 94 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

50.13 Hexagon head bolt, bearing housing

Pos: 95 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/UEB_Schaltbeispiele @ 8\mod_1344414291929_6.doc @ 65388 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 45

9.1.7 Circuit diagram examples
Pos: 96 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schaltbeispiele Pumpe @ 8\mod_1344585809491_6.doc @ 66401 @ @ 1

Circuit diagram examples for pump

The following pipeline diagrams show the essential components for a pump installation.
C30 C16 C13 C12 C11 C10
PI

B30

D30

A28
E13 PI FI E14 E11 E10
A41

A21
D13 D14 D11 D10
A20 PI FI

A27
D51
D56
E30 D50

Fig. 19 Circuit diagram example for pump with mounted fluid separator

C16 C13 PI C12 C11 C10

A28
A20 E13 PI FI E14 E11 E10

C30

D13 D14 D11 D10

PI FI

A27
D51
D56
E30 D50

Fig. 20 Circuit diagram example for pump without fluid separator

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 46

 C30 C16 C13 C12 C11 C10
PI

B30

D31
B40 D30

A28
E13 PI FI
E14 E11 E10
A20

E30 A27
D51
D56
D10 D50 D10
D21

TC D26
D20

D22

Fig. 21 Circuit diagram example for pump with mounted fluid separator and self-regulating seal liquid circuit

A20

A21

A41

Fig. 22 Circuit diagram example for pump with side separator

B30 B30

D30 D30
B40

A20 A41 A20

A41

A21 A21

Fig. 23 Circuit diagram example for more than one pump with a common fluid container

B30 B30
D30

B40

A20 A20

A21 A21

D40
A41 A41
A46 A46

Fig. 24 Circuit diagram example for more than one pump with a raised fluid container

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 47

Key
A20 Vacuum pump C13 Pressure gauge D30 Discharge pipe for
separated seal liquid
A21 Line for partial C16 Manifold pipe D31 Cooling tower or heat
discharge exchanger
A27 Full-draining plugs C30 Pressure line (gas) D40 Discharge pipe for excess
seal liquid
A28 Plug allowing pressure D10 Seal liquid supply line D50 Discharge pipe for
gauges to be connected draining and flushing
A41 Shut-off fitting (for D11 Shut-off fitting D51 Shut-off fitting
ensuring partial
discharge)
A46 Funnel or sight glass D13 Pressure gauge D56 Funnel or sight glass
B30 Liquid separator D14 Mass-flow meter E10 Flushing liquid supply line
installed (for external flushing)
B40 Seal liquid receiver D20 Supply line for additional E11 Shut-off fitting
tank seal liquid
C10 Inlet line D21 Shut-off fitting E13 Pressure gauge
C11 Shut-off fitting D22 Valve for bypass E14 Mass-flow meter
C12 Check valve D26 Temperature controller E30 Drain pipe for shaft seal
leakage
Pos: 97 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 48

Pos: 98 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schaltbeispiele Kompressor @ 8\mod_1344589318058_6.doc @ 66421 @ @ 1

Circuit diagram examples for compressor

The following pipeline diagrams show the essential components for a compressor installation.
PI

PI

PI FI

PI FI

Fig. 25 Circuit diagram example for compressor with pressure connection at top

PI

PI

PI FI

PI FI

Fig. 26 Circuit diagram example for compressor with pressure connection at bottom

PI

PI

PI FI

TC

Fig. 27 Circuit diagram example for compressor with self-regulating seal liquid circuit

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 49

Key
A10 Compressor C20 Bypass line D26 Temperature controller
A17 Full-draining plugs C21 Gate valve D27 Heat exchanger
A18 Plug allowing pressure C30 Pressure line (gas) D30 Discharge pipe for separated
gauges to be connected seal liquid
A21 Line for partial discharge C31 Gate valve D31 Valve
B10 Liquid separator C32 Check valve D50 Discharge pipe for draining
and flushing
B11 Fluid level indicator C40 Pressure line (gas and liquid) D51 Valve
B13 Pressure gauge D10 Seal liquid supply line D56 Funnel or sight glass
B17 Safety valve D11 Valve E10 Flushing liquid supply line
(external flushing)
C10 Inlet line D13 Pressure gauge E11 Valve
C11 Gate valve D14 Mass-flow meter E13 Pressure gauge
C12 Check valve D20 Return line for separated seal E14 Mass-flow meter
liquid
C13 Pressure gauge D21 Shut-off fitting E30 Drain pipe for shaft seal
leakage
Pos: 99 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1
Pos: 100 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 50

 9.2.3 Vibration
9.2 Technical specifications
Pos: 102 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Umgebungsbedingungen @ 8\mod_1344415065213_6.doc @ 65464 @ 3 @ 1
Type 2BE3/4 … Permitted standard vibration
9.2.1 Ambient conditions speeds (rigid installation) in
mm/s, RMS
Operation under any other ambient conditions 30./32. ≤ 4.5
should be agreed to with the manufacturer.
40./42. ≤ 4.5
50./52. ≤ 4.5
60./62. ≤ 4.5
Temperature Relative humidity [%]
67. ≤ 4.5
Long-term Short-term
72. ≤ 4.5
-20 °C to +40 °C ≤ 85 ≤ 100
[≤ 104 °F] Table 16 Permitted vibration speeds

Table 14 Ambient conditions In special cases, higher vibration values are

Pos: 103 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schalldruckpegel @ 8\mod_1344438212358_6.doc @ 65871 @ 3 @ 1
agreed and approved.
9.2.2 Sound pressure level
Pos: 105 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Anzugsdrehmomente @ 8\mod_1344415825490_6.doc @ 65521 @ 3 @ 1

Type Sound pressure level at

9.2.4 Tightening torques
measurement surface and
sound power level Bolts of strength class A4-70 (≤M20) or 8.8 and
higher
LpA [dB(A)] LWA [dB(A)]
2BE3/4 30./32. 75-82 89-98 Thread size Tightening torque
2BE3/4 40./42. 77-86 92-101 [Nm] [ft lbs]
2BE3/4 50./52. 72-82 89-99 M8 20 15
2BE3/4 60./62. 76-91 93-107 M10 40 30
2BE3/4 67./72. 73-91 93-112 M12 70 52

Table 15 Sound pressure level M16 170 125

M20 340 250

The A-rated sound pressure specifications M24 600 443

(average sound pressure level at measurement
Table 17 Tightening torques for bolts of strength
surface or average sound power level) describe
class A4-70 (≤ M20) or 8.8 and higher
only the noise emitted by the vacuum pump or
compressor. Bolts of strength class 4.8 to 6.8
They are applicable as per EN ISO 2251 and
Thread size Tightening torque
EN ISO 3746 exclusively within a test
environment according to the standard with a [Nm] [ft lbs]
tolerance of +3 dB. M8 11 8
The sound pressure levels at the site of
M10 22 16
installation may differ significantly due to the
following factors: M12 38 28

 External noise not included in scope of M16 92 68

supply (e.g. flow noise in connected pipes M20 180 133
and components)
M24 310 230
 Acoustic structural feedback (e.g. echoes,
M36 1080 797
resonance)
M42 1700 1254
Pos: 104 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schwingung @ 8\mod_1344437748202_6.doc @ 65851 @ 3 @ 1

Table 18 Tightening torques for bolts of strength

class 4.8 to 6.8

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 51

Pos: 106 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Gewichtsangaben @ 8\mod_1344440442764_6.doc @ 65911 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.5 Weight specifications

Type Weight [t] Weight [sh tn]

2BE3/4
... Witho With Witho With
ut separator ut separator
acces and acces and
sories breeches sories breeches
pipe pipe
30. 1.5 1.8 1.7 2.0
32. 1.9 2.3 2.1 2.5
40. 2.9 3.4 3.2 3.8
42. 3.3 3.9 3.6 4.3
50. 5.4 6.2 6.0 6.8
52. 6.0 6.8 6.6 7.5
60. 8.2 9.2 9.0 10.1
62. 9.1 10.2 10.0 11.2
67. 11.4 12.7 12.6 14.0
72. 14.2 15.7 15.7 17.3

Table 19 Weight specifications

Pos: 107 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1
Pos: 108 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Packungsgröße Stopfbuchsen @ 8\mod_1344498664854_6.doc @ 65990 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.6 Gland packing sizes

Data for gland packing 2BE3/4...

30. / 32. 40. / 42. 50. / 52. 60. / 62. 67. 72.

Nominal diameter of shaft [mm] 155 205 245 270 290 305
sleeve [in.] 6.102 8.07 9.646 10.63 11.417 12.008
Total length of packing rings [m] 4.6 5.9 7.1 7.7 8.3 8.7
per machine [ft] 15.09 19.36 23.29 25.26 27.23 28.54
Length of an individual [mm] 560 710 850 940 1000 1040
packing ring [in.] 22.05 27.95 33.46 37.00 39.37 40.94
Packing ring cross-sections [mm x mm] 12 x 12 14 x 14 16 x 16 16 x 16 16 x 16 18 x 18
[in. x in.] 0.47 x 0.55 x 0.63 x 0.63 x 0.63 x 0.71 x
0.47 0.55 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.71
Number of internal packing rings per 2
stuffing box
Number of external packing rings per 2
stuffing box
Quality Light ramie fiber packing with PTFE impregnation or cotton
packing ( spare parts list)

Table 20 Technical data for gland packing

Pos: 109 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1
Pos: 110 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Wellendichtungen @ 8\mod_1344501869811_6.doc @ 66069 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 52

9.2.7 Shaft seals
9.2.9 Seal liquids
Type Shaft seal
Size Value
2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 3 Stuffing box with external
Properties Non-flammable, non-
flushing
explosive, non-
2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 4 Self-flushing stuffing box aggressive, non-toxic
2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 5 Mechanical seals, various (e.g. water)

2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 6 designs Free of foreign matter

( Chapter 1.2, Page 6) Matching the processed
2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 7
materials and media
2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 8
Temperature Nominal 15°C
2BE3/4 . . . - . . . 9 value [59 °F]
Table 21 Shaft seal
Limit 0°C...65°C
Pos: 111 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Fördermedien @ 8\mod_1344605753926_6.doc @ 66481 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.8 Pumped fluids values [32 °F...140 °F]

Compressor mode Vapor temperature At least 10 K above
operating temperature
Size Value
Particle size < 10 μm
Pumped fluid type Gas as per planning
Solids content < 200 ppm
documents or catalog
Viscosity < 25 cSt
Permissible absolute 900...2000 mbar
intake pressure [13...29 psia] Table 24 Requirements for seal liquids
Pos: 113 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

Permissible absolute Depending on speed

discharge pressure and type
Permissible temperature 0 °C...80 °C
range [32 °F...176 °F]

Table 22 Compressor pumped fluid

Vacuum mode

Size Value
Pumped fluid type Gas as per planning
documents or catalog
Permissible absolute min. 160 mbar
intake pressure [min 2.3 psia]
Permissible absolute max. 1100 mbar
discharge pressure [max. 16 psia]
Permissible temperature 0 °C...80 °C
range [32 °F...176 °F]

Table 23 Fluid permitted for vacuum pump

Pos: 114 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 53

Pos: 115 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Betriebsflüssigkeitsvolumenströme Kompressorbetrieb @ 8\mod_1344502353359_6.doc @ 66089 @ @ 1

Standard seal liquid flow rates in compressor mode

Type 2BE3/4... Permissible Seal liquid flow rate [m³/h] depending on compression pressure
speed range [bar absolute] (tolerance approx. ± 10 %), atmospheric intake
pressure
nB 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 bar
rpm bar bar bar bar bar bar bar
30. 566...809 5.4 7.8 9.0 11.4 14.0 16.2 18.6 –
32. 566...809 5.8 8.0 10.6 13.0 15.6 18.0 20.4 –
40. 428...612 5.8 10.0 13.3 17.1 20.8 24.6 28.3 32.1
42. 428...612 5.8 11.7 16.7 22.5 27.5 32.9 – –
50. 334...477 5.8 12.5 19.2 25.8 32.5 38.8 45.4 52.1
52. 334...477 5.8 14.2 22.5 30.4 38.5 46.3 – –
60. 283...405 5.8 15.0 25.0 34.0 44.0 53.0 – –
62. 283...405 5.8 17.5 29.0 40.0 52.0 – – –
67. 261...373 5.8 20.0 33.0 48.0 61.0 74.0 – –
72. 238...341 5.8 22.0 39.0 56.0 72.0 89.0 – –

Table 25 Seal liquid flow rate in compressor mode (ISO units)

– Operation not possible/not permitted

Type 2BE3/4... Permissible speed Seal liquid flow rate [US gpm] depending on compression
range pressure [psig] (tolerance approx. ± 10 %), atmospheric intake
pressure
nB 2.7 5.6 8.5 11.4 14.3 17.2 20.1 23.0
rpm psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig
30. 566...809 24 31 40 50 62 71 82 –
32. 566...809 26 35 47 57 69 79 90 –
40. 428...612 26 44 59 75 92 108 125 141
42. 428...612 26 52 74 99 121 145 – –
50. 334...477 26 55 85 114 143 171 200 229
52. 334...477 26 63 99 134 170 204 – –
60. 283...405 26 66 110 150 194 233 277 319
62. 283...405 26 77 128 126 229 273 – –
67. 261...373 26 88 145 211 269 326 – –
72. 238...341 26 97 172 247 317 392 – –

Table 26 Seal liquid flow rate in compressor mode (US units)

– Operation not possible/not permitted

Pos: 116 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 54

Pos: 117 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Betriebsflüssigkeitsvolumenströme Vakuumbetrieb @ 8\mod_1344503848888_6.doc @ 66109 @ @ 1

Standard seal liquid flow rates in vacuum mode

For higher seal liquid flow rates (refrigerant

circuit), the values specified in the table should
be doubled..

Type 2BE3/4... Permissible Seal liquid flow rate [m³/h] depending on intake pressure [mbar
speed range absolute] (tolerance approx. ± 10 %), atmospheric compression
pressure
nB 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800
rpm mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar
30. 453...809 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.1 4.4 3.7 3.0 2.4
32. 453...809 6.7 7.0 7.1 6.5 5.6 4.7 3.8 3.0
40. 343...612 9.4 9.7 9.9 9.0 7.9 6.6 5.3 4.2
42. 343...612 12.8 13.2 13.5 12.3 10.7 9.0 7.3 5.8
50. 229...477 17.4 17.7 18.3 16.6 14.4 12.1 9.9 7.8
52. 229...477 21.1 21.6 22.2 20.2 17.6 14.8 12.0 9.5
60. 194...405 24.1 24.7 25.4 23.0 20.1 16.9 13.7 10.9
62. 194...405 29.4 30.1 30.9 28.0 24.4 20.5 16.7 13.2
67. 179...373 34.6 35.5 36.4 33.0 28.7 24.1 19.7 15.5
72. 164...341 41.3 42.2 43.5 39.4 34.3 28.9 23.5 18.6

Table 27 Seal liquid flow rate in vacuum mode (ISO units)

– Operation not possible/not permitted

Type 2BE3/4 ... Permissible Seal liquid flow rate [US gpm] depending on intake pressure
speed range [HgV] (tolerance approx. ± 10 %), atmospheric compression
pressure
nB 24 22.5 21 18.1 15.1 12.2 9.21 6.3
rpm HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV
30. 453...809 23 24 25 23 19 16 13 11
32. 453...809 30 31 31 29 25 21 17 13
40. 343...612 41 43 44 40 35 29 23 19
42. 343...612 56 58 60 54 47 40 32 26
50. 229...477 77 78 81 73 63 53 44 34
52. 229...477 93 95 98 89 78 65 53 42
60. 194...405 106 109 112 101 89 75 60 48
62. 194...405 130 133 136 123 108 90 74 58
67. 179...373 152 156 160 145 126 106 87 68
72. 164...341 182 186 192 174 151 127 104 82

Table 28 Seal liquid flow rate in vacuum mode (US units)

– Operation not possible/not permitted

Pos: 118 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 55

Pos: 119 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Sperrflüssigkeit der Wellendichtung @ 8\mod_1352271925233_6.doc @ 69581 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.10 Flushing liquid for shaft sealing with external flushing

Size Value
Type  see section 9.2.9
Temperature Nominal value +15 °C [59 °F]
Limit value Min. 0 °C [32 °F]
Max. 65 °C [149 °F]
Maximum temperature of 65 °C or minimum clearance of 10 K
to vapor pressure of flushing liquid in the sealing chamber. The
lower value must be applied.
Consult the manufacturer of the shaft sealing, if necessary.
Inlet pressure For stuffing boxes: 0.1...0.3 bar [1.45...4.35 psi] above discharge pressure. Adjust
to slight dripping.
For single-acting Ca. 0.1...0.3 bar [ca. 1.45...4.35 psi] above inlet pressure of
mechanical seal: seal liquid (with branching of seal liquid supply line) OR above
discharge pressure (with external supply line)
For double-acting According to specifications of the manufacturer.
mechanical seal:
Flow rate For stuffing boxes: 0.5 dm³/min [0.132 gal (US)/min (0.017 ft³/min)]
(Supply on D- and Heavily dependent on the setting of the stuffing box. Adjust to
N-side!) slight dripping.
For mechanical seals: According to specifications of the manufacturer.

Tab. 29 Flushing liquid for shaft sealing with external flushing

Pos: 120 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63890 @ @ 1

Pos: 121 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/KP2K Schmiermittel @ 8\mod_1344500469063_6.doc @ 66029 @ 3 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 56

 Relubrication intervals
9.2.11 Lubricants

The relubrication intervals are valid for normal-

Use KP2K lubricating greases according to load, low-vibration running, approximately
DIN 51825 with lithium soap as the thickener neutral ambient air and providing that high-
and mineral oil as the base oil. quality antifriction bearing greases from the
selection listed in the table are used.
In the case of unfavorable conditions, e.g.
Manufacturer Grease name increased humidity of ambient air, the
relubrication intervals must be correspondingly
SHELL Alvania EP (LF) 2 shortened.
[used for first lubrication in the
factory]  Relubricate every 2000 service hours, at least
every six months.
AGIP GR MU EP2
 Change the grease every 20,000 service hours,
CHEVRON Dura-Lith Grease EP2
at least every 3 years.
TEXACO Novatex Grease EP2 Pos: 123 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Entkalkungslösungen @ 8\mod_1344419448135_6.doc @ 65712 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.12 Descaling solutions

DEA Paragon EP2
ESSO Beacon EP2 Descaling solutions Notes
MOBIL Mobilux EP2 15-17 parts by weight of 80% Cleaning when
phosphoric acid to 100 parts machine is at a
Table 30 Lubricants to be used for antifriction by weight of water standstill
bearings
Pos: 122 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Fettschmiermengen @ 8\mod_1344500251019_6.doc @ 66009 @ @ 1
2 parts by weight of 80% Cleaning when
Type Grease quantity per phosphoric acid to 100 parts machine is at a
lubrication point by weight of water standstill

[g] [oz] 5% formic acid

2BE3 30. / 32. 90 3.2 Table 32 Descaling solutions

Pos: 124 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Konservierungsmittel @ 8\mod_1344501441957_6.doc @ 66049 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 40. / 42. 100 3.5

9.2.13 Preservative
2BE3 50. / 52. 140 5
2BE3 60. / 62. 160 5.7 Recommended preservative AVILUB VCI 1414.
2BE3 67. / 72. 240 8.5 AVILUB VCI 1414 is a ready-to-use mixture of
organic corrosion inhibitors on an aqueous
2BE4 30. / 32. 40 1.5 basis with film-coating properties. It is
2BE4 40. / 42. 40 1.5 biologically degradable and its vapors are not
harmful to health. AVILUB VCI 1414 contains
2BE4 50. / 52. 60 2.2 no nitrites, chromates, or silicones.
2BE4 60. / 62. 60 2.2 Pos: 125 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63871 @ @ 1

2BE4 67. / 72. 90 3.2

Table 31 Minimum quantities for greasing

antifriction bearings
Pos: 126 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 57

Pos: 127 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Stutzenbelastung an den Flanschen @ 8\mod_1344438787906_6.doc @ 65891 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.14 Flange loads according to ISO 5199

2BE3/4 Flange 1 Flange 2 Flange 3 Flange 4

DN F MB MT DN F MB MT DN F MB MT DN F MB MT
[N] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [Nm] [Nm]
30./32. 150 2400 1000 1350 150 1900 820 1100 200 4200 2400 3200 200 3500 1900 2500
40./42. 250 4400 3000 4100 250 3600 2500 3350 300 5700 5000 6600 300 5700 5000 6600
50./52. 300 4400 3500 4700 300 5200 4200 5600 350 5700 5200 6900 350 5700 5200 6900
60./62. 350 7000 6700 9000 350 6100 5700 7600 400 7500 7900 10000 400 7500 7900 10000
67. 350 7000 6700 9000 350 6100 5700 7600 500 9100 11500 15000 500 9100 11500 15000
72. 400 7000 7300 9750 400 6100 6200 8200 500 9100 11500 15000 500 9100 11500 15000

Table 33 Forces and torques permissibly applicable to the flanges (ISO units)

2BE3/4 Flange 1 Flange 2 Flange 3 Flange 4

DN F MB [ft MT DN F MB [ft MT [ft DN F MB MT [ft DN F MB [ft MT [ft
[lbf] lbs] [ft [lbf] lbs] lbs] [lbf] [ft lbs] [lbf] lbs] lbs]
lbs] lbs]
30./32. 6 540 735 995 6 425 605 810 8 945 1770 2360 8 785 1900 1845
40./42. 10 990 2210 3025 10 810 1845 2470 12 1280 3690 4865 12 1280 3690 4865
50./52. 12 990 2580 3465 12 1170 3100 4130 14 1280 3835 5090 14 1280 3835 5090
60./62. 14 1575 4940 6635 14 1370 4200 5600 16 1685 5825 7375 16 1685 5825 7375
67. 14 1575 4940 6635 14 1370 4200 5600 20 2045 8480 11100 20 2045 8480 11100
72. 16 1575 5385 7190 16 1370 4570 6050 20 2045 8480 11100 20 2045 8480 11100

Table 34 Forces and torques permissibly applicable to the flanges (US units)

Fig. 28 Overview of forces and torques to which the flanges are subjected
Pos: 128 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Pos: 129 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Unbedenklichkeitsbescheinigung @ 8\mod_1344419935225_6.doc @ 65769 @ 2 @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 58

9.3 Safety certificate
Fill in, sign, and submit this certificate when returning the assembly/machine for repairs and/or maintenance.
Repair and/or maintenance of the returned assembly/machine will be performed only if this certificate
has been filled in completely and submitted. A separate certificate needs to be submitted for each
assembly/machine.
The certificate should be attached to the exterior packaging. An additional copy of the certificate needs
to be submitted in advance, e.g. by fax, to the factory executing the order.
This certificate may be filled out by qualified personnel with the operator's express authorization.
Operator's details:
Company/department/institute:
Street:
City, zip code:
Contact person:
Position:
Phone no.:
Fax no.:

Details of the assembly/machine:

Product designation:
Type:
Factory no. (No.N):
Reason for return:

The signatory hereby certifies that the above assembly/machine*)

Has not been in contact with hazardous substances.
Has not been used in any materials and/or components, such as seals, containing asbestos.
Was used for the following
application

and came into contact with the following substances subject to mandatory identification or harmful to
health:
Trade name: Chemical name: Substance properties
(e.g. toxic, flammable,
corrosive, radioactive):

*)
Check as appropriate

Table 35 Safety certificate

Pos: 130 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63909 @ @ 1

Pos: 131 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Rückseite @ 8\mod_1344420072490_6.doc @ 65807 @ @ 1

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 59

Service Centers

Australia Wetherill Park, Sydney, NSW

Brazil Campinas-SP
China Boshan, Beijing, Shanghai, Chengdu,
Guangzhou
Germany Nuremberg
The Netherlands Assendelft
Singapore Singapore
South Africa Wadeville
South Korea Seoul
United Kingdom Winsford, Cheshire
USA Birmingham, AL
Cleveland, OH
Houston, TX
St. Peters, MO
Vancouver, WA

Please refer to our website for the full addresses:

www.GDNash.com → Sales & Service → Service Contacts

Nash – Zweigniederlassung der

Gardner Denver Deutschland GmbH
Katzwanger Straße 150
90461 Nuremberg
Germany

Edition 01/2016 Phone: +49 (0) 911-1454-0

Print no. OM5004 +49 (0) 911-1454-5256 (Service)
Language EN Fax: +49 (0) 911-1454-6935
+49 (0) 911-1454-5252 (Service)
E-mail: nash.de@gardnerdenver.com
Internet: www.GDNash.com

We reserve the right to make technical changes.

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Inhalt ===

Types 2BE3 30. to 72. / 2BE4 30. to 72. 01/2016 60

压缩机 真空泵
始说明书 2BE3 30.–72. /
2BE4 30.–72.
Pos: 2 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Titelbild/2BE3/2BE4 30.-72. Titelbild @ 8\mod_1344953365879_54858.doc @ 67581 @ @ 1

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Titel ===

版本 01/2016 Nash – Zweigniederlassung der

印刷号 OM5004 Gardner Denver Deutschland GmbH
语言 ZH_CN Katzwanger Straße 150
90461 Nürnberg
德国（Germany)
电话：+49 (0) 911-1454-5256
传真：+49 (0) 911-1454-5252
网址：http://www.GDNash.com

保留技术更改权利。
使用前仔细阅读。
保存以供将来使用。

目录
1 关于本说明书 .................................................. 6
1.1 目标群 ............................................................. 6
1.2 适用文件 ......................................................... 6
1.3 警告提示与标志 ............................................... 7
1.4 专业术语 ......................................................... 8
2 安全................................................................. 9
2.1 按照规定使用 .................................................. 9
2.2 一般安全提示 .................................................. 9
2.2.1 产品安全 ......................................................... 9
2.2.2 运营商的责任 .................................................. 9
2.2.3 有关人员的责任 ............................................. 10
2.3 特殊危险 ....................................................... 10
2.3.1 爆炸危险区域 ................................................ 10
2.3.2 危险的输送介质和工作液体 ........................... 10
3 结构和功能 .................................................... 11
3.1 标识............................................................... 11
3.1.1 铭牌............................................................... 11
3.1.2 ATEX认证铭牌 ................................................ 11
3.2 结构............................................................... 12
3.3 轴密封 ........................................................... 12
3.3.1 端面密封 ....................................................... 12
3.3.2 填料盒 ........................................................... 12
3.4 轴承座 ........................................................... 12
3.5 功能............................................................... 13
3.5.1 工作液体 ....................................................... 13
4 运输、储存和废物处理 .................................. 14
4.1 运输............................................................... 14
4.1.1 拆除包装和检查交货状态 .............................. 14
4.1.2 升降............................................................... 15
4.2 新机器防腐 .................................................... 16
4.2.1 标准防腐 ....................................................... 16
4.2.2 长期防腐 ....................................................... 16
4.3 对暂时停止的机器进行防腐 ........................... 16
4.3.1 不锈钢机器防腐 ............................................. 16
2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72.
4.3.2 灰口铸铁机器或钢质机器的防腐 .................... 16
4.4 存放 ............................................................... 17
4.5 清除防腐剂 .................................................... 17
4.6 废物处理 ....................................................... 17
5 安装和连接 .................................................... 18
5.1 准备安装 ....................................................... 18
5.1.1 检查机器状态 ................................................ 18
5.1.2 检查环境条件 ................................................ 18
5.1.3 准备安装地 .................................................... 18
5.1.4 检查地基 ....................................................... 18
5.1.5 清除防腐剂 .................................................... 18
5.1.6 平衡转子 ....................................................... 18
5.2 使用地基/钢筋结构搭建 ................................ 19
5.2.1 准备地基/钢筋结构 ....................................... 19
5.2.2 固定机座 ....................................................... 19
5.2.3 将机器放置在机座上 ...................................... 19
5.3 使用基础垫块搭建 ......................................... 19
5.4 安装电机 ....................................................... 20
5.5 设计管道 ....................................................... 20
5.5.1 铺设支撑物和法兰接口 .................................. 20
5.5.2 确定管道内径 ................................................ 20
5.5.3 引流泄漏物 .................................................... 20
5.5.4 安装安全和控制装置（推荐） ....................... 21
5.6 连接管道 ....................................................... 21
5.6.1 避免管道污染 ................................................ 21
5.6.2 安装工作液体管道 ......................................... 21
5.6.3 安装辅助管道（如果有） .............................. 21
5.6.4 安装吸气管道 ................................................ 21
5.6.5 安装压力管道 ................................................ 22
5.6.6 压缩机运行：连接旁通管 .............................. 22
5.6.7 检查无张力的管道连接 .................................. 22
5.6.8 检查管道的密封性 ......................................... 22
5.7 电气连接 ....................................................... 22
5.7.1 连接电机 ....................................................... 22
5.8 精细校准联轴节 ............................................. 22
5.9 安装接触保护装置 ......................................... 22
5.10 在安装后检查 ................................................ 22
01/2016 2
6 运行............................................................... 23 8 故障排除 ....................................................... 33

6.1 准备调试 ....................................................... 23

9 附件 ............................................................... 36
6.1.1 确定机器配置 ................................................ 23
9.1 图纸 ............................................................... 36
6.1.2 清除防腐剂 .................................................... 23
9.1.1 备件清单 ....................................................... 36
6.1.3 润滑轴承 ....................................................... 23
9.1.2 分解图 ........................................................... 38
6.1.4 准备辅助操作系统（若配备） ....................... 23
9.1.3 尺寸 ............................................................... 39
6.1.5 加注工作液体 ................................................ 23
9.1.4 安装辅助垫圈截面图 ...................................... 40
6.1.6 在启动前设置工作液体液位 ........................... 23
9.1.5 填料盒截面图 ................................................ 40
6.1.7 设置用于轴密封的封闭液体 ........................... 24
9.1.6 轴瓦截面图 .................................................... 40
6.1.8 检查旋转方向 ................................................ 24
9.1.7 开关示例 ....................................................... 43
6.2 投入运行 ....................................................... 24
9.2 技术数据 ....................................................... 48
6.2.1 启动............................................................... 24
9.2.1 环境条件 ....................................................... 48
6.2.2 检查运行 ....................................................... 25
9.2.2 声平 ............................................................... 48
6.2.3 关闭............................................................... 26
9.2.3 振动 ............................................................... 48
6.3 停止运行 ....................................................... 26
9.2.4 拧紧力矩 ....................................................... 48
6.4 重新投入运行 ................................................ 26
9.2.5 重量信息 ....................................................... 49

7 维护和修理 .................................................... 27 9.2.6 填料套尺寸 .................................................... 49

7.1 监测............................................................... 27 9.2.7 轴密封 ........................................................... 50

7.1.1 检查............................................................... 27 9.2.8 输送介质 ....................................................... 50

7.1.2 修整............................................................... 27 9.2.9 工作液体 ....................................................... 50

7.1.3 采用油脂润滑的滚子轴承 .............................. 28 9.2.10 进行轴密封的封闭液体（带外部供应装置） .. 53

7.1.4 端面密封 ....................................................... 28 9.2.11 润滑剂 ........................................................... 54

7.1.5 填料盒 ........................................................... 28 9.2.12 除钙方案 ....................................................... 54

7.1.6 清洁机器 ....................................................... 30 9.2.13 防腐剂 ........................................................... 54

7.2 拆卸............................................................... 30 9.2.14 管接头负荷符合 ISO 5199 ............................. 55

7.2.1 将机器发给制造商 ......................................... 31 9.3 安全证明 ....................................................... 56

7.2.2 准备拆卸 ....................................................... 31

7.3 安装............................................................... 31

7.4 订购备件 ....................................................... 32

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 3

图片目录
图 1 铭牌 .......................................................... 11

图 2 ATEX 认证铭牌 .......................................... 11

图 3 2BE3/4 30.-72. 结构 ............................... 12

图 4 将起重装置固定在机组上 .......................... 15

图 5 将起重装置固定在单个机器上 ................... 15

图 6 使用基础垫块搭建..................................... 19

图 7 安装辅助垫圈 ............................................ 28

图 8 移除密装圈 ............................................... 28

图 9 套环拔出器（3.2 mm (1/8 in.)钢丝） .... 28

图 10 装入新的填料套 ........................................ 29

图 11 真空泵 2BE3/4
分解图（提供的配置可能在细节上存在偏差
）.............................................................. 38

图 12 主要尺寸 ................................................... 39

图 13 安装辅助垫圈 ............................................ 40

图 14 填料盒 ...................................................... 40

图 15 驱动侧轴瓦 2BE3 ...................................... 40

图 16 驱动侧轴瓦 2BE4 ...................................... 41

图 17 非驱动侧轴瓦 2BE3 ................................... 41

图 18 非驱动侧轴瓦 2BE4 ................................... 42

图 19 泵开关示例（已安装液体分离器）............ 43

图 20 泵开关示例（无液体分离器） ................... 43

图 21
. 泵开关示例（已安装液体分离器和自调节的
工作液体回路） ........................................ 44

图 22 泵开关示例（带有侧分离器） ................... 44

图 23 共用一个液体容器的多个泵的开关示例 .... 44

图 24
. 多个泵（液体容器的容量有所提升）的开关
示例 .......................................................... 44

图 25 压缩机开关示例（装有上压力接口） ........ 46

图 26 压缩机开关示例（装有下压力接口） ........ 46

图 27
. 压缩机开关示例（含自调节的工作液体回路
）.............................................................. 46

图 28 法兰上所使用的力和力矩的概览 ............... 55

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 4

表格目录 表19 重量信息 ................................................... 49

表20 填料套技术数据 ........................................ 49

表1 目标群和任务 .............................................. 6
表21 轴密封....................................................... 50
表2 适用文件和目的 .......................................... 6
表22 压缩机输送介质 ........................................ 50
表3 警告提示以及不注意提示的后果 ................. 7
表23 真空泵输送介质 ........................................ 50
表4 符号和含义 ................................................. 7
表24 对工作液体的要求 ..................................... 50
表5 专业术语及含义 .......................................... 8
表25 压缩机运行时的工作液体流量（ISO 单位）
表6 平衡后的轴标识 ........................................ 18
................................................................. 51
表7 运行中断时的措施..................................... 26
表26 压缩机运行时的工作液体流量（美式单位）
表8 措施取决于工作液体的特性 ...................... 26 ................................................................. 51

表9 故障/编号分配 .......................................... 33 表27 真空运行时的工作液体流量（ISO 单位） . 52

表10 故障表 ...................................................... 35 表28 真空运行时的工作液体流量（美式单位） . 52

表11 元件名称依据零件号 ................................. 37 表29 进行轴密封的封闭液体（带外部供应装置）

................................................................. 53
表12 主要尺寸 ................................................... 39
表30 可用的滚子轴承润滑脂.............................. 54
表13 用于导出旧油脂的连接螺纹 ...................... 42
表31 滚子轴承中的最低润滑油脂量 ................... 54
表14 环境条件 ................................................... 48
表32 除钙方案 ................................................... 54
表15 声平 .......................................................... 48
表33 法兰上允许的力和扭矩（ISO 单位） ........ 55
表16 允许的振动速度 ........................................ 48
表34 法兰上允许的力和力矩（美式单位） ........ 55
表17 拧紧力矩 螺栓的强度等级 A4-70 (≤ M20)
或 8.8 及更高 .......................................... 48 表35 安全证明 ................................................... 56

表18 拧紧力矩 螺栓强度等级 4.8 至 6.8 ........ 48

Pos: 4 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Zu dieser Anleitung @ 8\mod_1341243550302_54858.doc @ 60731 @ 1 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 5

 Pos: 5 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

1 关于本说明书
本说明书
 是机器的一部分。
 适用于所有提及的机型。
 描述了各个运行阶段中安全正确的使用方式。
Pos: 6 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Zielgruppen @ 8\mod_1341243732276_54858.doc @ 60750 @ 2 @ 1

1.1 目标群

目标群 任务
使用者  将本说明书保存在设备使用地备用，同时也用于今
后的使用。
 监督员工阅读并重视本说明书以及使用文件，尤其
是安全和警告提示。
 注意其它与设备相关的规定准则。
 仅允许委托专业人员在机器上从事工作。

专业人员、安装人员  请阅读并遵循本说明书和其它适用文件，尤其是安
全和警告提示。

表1 目标群和任务

Pos: 7 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Mitgeltende Dokumente @ 8\mod_1344006312608_54858.doc @ 63927 @ 2 @ 1

1.2 适用文件

文件 目的
外形尺寸图 尺寸、安装尺寸
文本页 外形尺寸图说明
备件清单 备件订购
ATEX 附加使用说明书 在有爆炸危险区域使用时的提示
随附元件的附加使用说明书 例如电机、端面密封、离合器

表2 适用文件和目的

Pos: 8 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 6

Pos: 9 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Warnhinweise und Symbole @ 8\mod_1344008599378_54858.doc @ 63946 @ 2 @ 1

1.3 警告提示与标志

警告提示 危险级别 违规后果

直接危险 死亡、重伤

可能出现的危险 死亡、重伤

可能出现的危险状况 轻伤

可能出现的危险状况 财产损失

表3 警告提示以及不注意提示的后果

标志 含义
安全标志
 为避免受伤或死亡，遵守所有标有该安全标志的步骤。

 操作指南
1., 2., ... 多步骤的操作指南

 前提条件

 相互对照
信息，指示

表4 符号和含义

Pos: 10 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/01 Zu dieser Anleitung/Fachbegriffe @ 8\mod_1344236869051_54858.doc @ 63970 @ 2 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 7

1.4 专业术语

术语 含义
挤出压力 借助这一压力可检查机器的密封性。
以及：
– 试验压力

机组 机器和驱动电机组成的单元。
进气压力 待输送的气体压力/机器吸气管接头处的蒸汽。
驱动侧 机器连接驱动装置的一侧。
以及：
– D 侧
– 驱动侧
– DE (Drive-End)

出口压力 待输送的气体压力/机器压力管接头处的蒸汽，压缩压力。
工作液体 在机器中循环的液体，同时用于间隙密封以及导出压缩热量。
专业人员 基于其教育、经验和所受培训，以及在专业标准、规定、事故预防规定、工作环境
范围内所具备的相应知识，能够完成特定作业（例如调试、操作、维护、修理），
并且能够发现并避免可能存在的危险的人员。
首先应当具备急救以及操作本地救援设备的相关知识。
这些人员必须获得设备安全责任人员的授权，以便从事相应的必要操作。
压缩机 用于生成超压的机器，压缩器
机器 此处：真空泵或压缩机。
用于吸出、输送和压缩气体/蒸汽以及形成真空和超压的单元。驱动装置在这里不视
为机器的一部分。
机组 两台或更多机器通过耦合方式相互连接，并安装在一个共同的基架上。
非驱动侧 机器没有连接驱动装置的一侧
以及：
– N 侧
– BS
– NDE (Non-Drive-
End)

封闭液体 为进行轴密封（端面密封以及填料）而供给的液体。
真空泵 用于生成真空的机器
压缩器 用于生成超压的机器，压缩机
压缩压力 待输送气体的压力/机器压力管接头处的蒸汽，出口压力。

表5 专业术语及含义
Pos: 11 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1
Pos: 12 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Sicherheit - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344237573995_54858.doc @ 63989 @ 1 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 8

 2.2 一般安全提示
2 安全
进行任何操作之前注意下列规定。
对由于不遵守文件规定而造成的损失，制造商不
承担责任。

Pos: 15 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Produktsicherheit @ 8\mod_1344238763023_54858.doc @ 64046 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 13 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 8\mod_1344237857968_54858.doc @ 64008 @ 2 @ 1

2.2.1 产品安全

2.1 按照规定使用 机器按照最新技术标准和公认的安全技术规定制造而

成。但是在使用时对于用户或第三方仍然存在造成肢
 机器仅用于输送指定的输送介质（ 订单数据单 体受伤甚至危及生命的危险，并且也有可能造成机器
）。 损坏。
 机器只能使用商定指定的工作液体（ 订单数据  只能在机器技术状态完好，按照规定并了解了安
单）。 全和危险状况的情况下，遵循本说明书对机器进
 避免干燥运转： 行操作。
会在短短数秒内造成初步伤害，例如损坏端面密  保证本说明书和所有使用文件的完整性和可读性
封和塑料件。 ，并且对其妥善保存以供有关人员随时使用。
– 确保机器仅使用工作液体运行，并且不能在  避免任何可能危及工作人员或无关第三者的工作
无工作液体的条件下运行。 方式。
 避免空化作用：  在出现涉及安全的故障时必须立即关停机器并由
– 完全打开吸气侧的装备，并且不要将其用于 相关责任人员排除故障。
输送流量的调节。  作为对文件编汇的补充，应遵守法律或其它安全
– 存在空穴危险时，如果机器类型允许，则可 和事故防范规定以及各运营国家适用的标准和准
以在出厂时装备一个防空穴保护装置（额外 则。
订购“-F80”）。
Pos: 16 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Pflichten des Betreibers @ 8\mod_1344239041960_54858.doc @ 64065 @ 3 @ 1

2.2.2 运营商的责任
 避免过热：
– 不要正对着已关闭的压力侧仪表操作机器。 需要具备安全意识的工作

 避免电机损坏：  只能在机器技术状态完好，按照规定并了解了安
– 注意每小时允许接通电机的次数（ 制造商 全和危险状况的情况下，遵循本说明书对机器进
说明）。 行操作。

 任何其它用途应与生产商协定。  确保遵守规章和实施监督：

 如果所供货的机器不包含电机，则必须按照 – 按照规定使用
2006/42/EG 机器指令的规定将机组补充完整。 – 法律和其他安全和事故防范规定
避免明显的错误使用（示例） – 处理危险品的安全规定

 注意机器在温度、压力、工作液体和转速方面的 – 相应国家的有效标准和指令
应用极限（ 第 9.2.1 章，第 48 页, 第  提供人员保护装置。
9.2.9 章，第 50 页）。
人员资格
 在使用辅助操作系统时，确保相应工作介质的持
续供给。  确保受托对机器作业的人员在工作开始前已经阅
读并理解了本说明书以及所有的适用文件，尤其
 只能根据本使用说明选择安装方式。禁止，例如
是其中的安全、维护和修理信息。
：
 划清职责、权限并进行人员监督。
– 头冲下安装
 只能由技术专业人员进行所有工作：
– 紧邻超热和超冷源安装
– 安全、维修和保养工作
– 安装位置间距离墙体太近
– 电气工作
Pos: 14 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344238398938_54858.doc @ 64027 @ 2 @ 1

 培训人员必须在专业技术人员的监督下才能操作
机器。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 9

安全装置

 设定下列安全装置并确保其功能：
– 对于热、冷或移动部件：在现场提供用于机
器的接触保护装置
– 在有可能出现静电时：进行恰当的接地
 切勿在安全装置受损的情况下运行机器：
– 定期检查并确保其功能。
保修

 在质保期间未经制造商允许禁止进行改装和维修
工作，或是擅自更改。
 只使用原厂部件或者经生产商许可的部件。
Pos: 17 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Pflichten des Personals @ 8\mod_1344239180164_54858.doc @ 64084 @ 3 @ 1

2.2.3 有关人员的责任

 请注意机器上的提示，保持其可读性，包括旋转
箭头、液体接口标识等。
 机器、连接保护和构件：
– 不得踩踏或作为攀爬辅助物使用
– 不得作为板、斜坡或者凹槽的支撑物使用
– 不得作为钢索绞车的锚点或者支撑物使用
– 不得作为纸张存放或者类似用途使用
– 不得在热的机器或电机零件上进行烹饪
– 不得使用煤气燃烧器或者类似工具除冰
 运行期间不得拆除用于热、冷和自行移动部件的
接触保护。
 若有必要，使用人员防护装备。
 只有在机器静止时才能在机器上工作。
 在进行任何安装和维护工作时都必须切断电机电
压并锁定。
 在机器上进行任何工作之后，都必须按照规定重
新安装安全装置。
Pos: 18 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/02 Sicherheit/Spezielle Gefahren @ 8\mod_1344239238308_54858.doc @ 64103 @ 233 @ 1

2.3 特殊危险

2.3.1 爆炸危险区域

 ATEX 附加使用说明书（ 第 1.2 章，第 6

页）。

2.3.2 危险的输送介质和工作液体

 在使用危险的输送介质和工作液体时（例如热的
、可燃、爆炸性、毒性或危害健康的介质）必须
遵循有关安全材料的安全规定。
 在机器上从事任何工作都必须佩戴人员保护装置
。
Pos: 19 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Aufbau und Funktion - Kennzeichnung @ 8\mod_1344241696504_54858.doc @ 64122 @ 1233 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 10

 3.1.2 ATEX认证铭牌

3 结构和功能
3.1 标识

3.1.1 铭牌

图 2 ATEX 认证铭牌

1 制造年份
2 使用 – 真空泵或压缩机
3 序列号
图 1 铭牌 4 类型
5 允许的 ATEX 范围
1 制造年份
2 使用 – 真空泵或压缩机
Pos: 20 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

3 序列号
4 类型
Pos: 21 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/2BE3/4 30.-72. Aufbau @ 8\mod_1344584894404_54858.doc @ 66360 @ 2 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 11

3.2 结构

图 3 2BE3/4 30.-72. 结构

1 轴 4 侧面铭牌（非驱动侧） 7 侧面铭牌（驱动侧）
2 轴承箱 5 控制盘
3 压力和吸气管接头 6 叶轮
Pos: 22 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1
Pos: 23 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Wellendichtungen - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344242578340_54858.doc @ 64160 @ 2 @ 1

3.3 轴密封 3.3.2 填料盒

通过铭牌上的型号名称确定安装了何种轴密封（ 填料盒必须始终保持轻微的泄漏，以导出摩擦热
第 9.2.7 章，第 50 页）。 量。
Pos: 24 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Gleitringdichtungen @ 8\mod_1344242629778_54858.doc @ 64179 @ 3 @ 1

3.3.1 端面密封

 带自冲洗的填料盒
端面密封具有一个由功能决定的漏损量。更多说
明请参见附加说明书（ 第 1.2 章，第 6  带外部冲洗的填料盒
页）。
Pos: 26 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Wellenlagerung @ 8\mod_1344243305000_54858.doc @ 64217 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 轴承座
 单面作用的端面密封 非驱动侧的固定轴承是机器的导向轴承。它负责接收
 双面作用的端面密封 径向和轴向力。设计原理：通过弹性离合器接收来自
Pos: 25 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Stopfbuchsen @ 8\mod_1344243233678_54858.doc @ 64198 @ 3 @ 1

运行的正常轴向力。
驱动侧的轴承仅负责接收径向力。
轴承已使用油脂润滑。
Pos: 27 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Funktion (einstufig) @ 8\mod_1344243359059_54858.doc @ 64236 @ 2 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 12

3.5 功能
在水环机中，叶轮将在一个相对于轴偏心放置的圆柱
或椭圆形外罩中进行旋转。
通过旋转叶轮，在外壳中的工作液体形成循环的液体
环。通过转子的偏心位置，液体环类似于活塞运动一
般进出叶轮通道。
在吸气侧液体环自行从叶轮轮毂升起。通过吸气孔进
入的输送气体量不断增加。
在压力测液体环再次靠近叶轮轮毂，并将压缩气体推
出压力开口。
Pos: 28 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/03 Aufbau und Funktion/Betriebsflüssigkeit @ 8\mod_1344243403040_54858.doc @ 64255 @ 3 @ 1

3.5.1 工作液体

可用的工作液体（ 第 9.2.9 章，第 50

页）。

通过压缩气体不断推出工作液体。因此必须不断引入
新的凉的工作液体。
工作液体的任务：
 机器中的间隙密封
 形成液体环
 导出压缩热量
 在自冲洗时冷却和润滑轴密封
Pos: 29 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/UEB_Transport, Lagerung, Entsorgung @ 8\mod_1344245889210_54858.doc @ 64274 @ 1 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 13

4 运输、储存和废物处理
Pos: 30 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Transportieren @ 8\mod_1344245931023_54858.doc @ 64293 @ 23 @ 1

4.1 运输

注意重量信息（ 第 9.2.5 章，第 49 页）。

4.1.1 拆除包装和检查交货状态

正常的供货范围原则上仅包括机器本身（没有附
加的构件，包括仪表、阀门、滑阀等）。

1. 在接收时打开机器/机组的包装并检查有无运输损
坏。
2. 如有运输损坏，应立即通知 GD Nash。
3. 按照当地的有效规定对包装材料进行废物处理。
Pos: 31 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Anheben @ 8\mod_1347371600549_54858.doc @ 69360 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 14

4.1.2 升降

危险

由坠落或倾斜的运输货物而引发的死亡或肢体挤伤！
 根据需运输的总重量选择升降装置。
 按照下图固定升降装置。确保不会损坏已安装的仪
表。
 升降装置不得固定在轴上。
 升降装置不得固定在电机吊环上。
 不许在悬挂着的重物下停留。
 运输物品应放置在水平地面上。

转子锁定装置用于保护轴承座，只有在拉起驱动 图 4 将起重装置固定在机组上
元件时才能取下（如果有的话）。
 在运输已经吊起的驱动元件时，必须采取适
当措施以对转子提供轴向支撑。

Pos: 32 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/2BE3/4 30.-72. Anheben @ 8\mod_1344608217504_54858.doc @ 66500 @ @ 1

图 5 将起重装置固定在单个机器上
1. 正确提升机器/机组。
2. 正确降下机器/机组。
Pos: 33 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren neuer Maschinen @ 9\mod_1379317681170_54858.doc @ 87650 @ 233 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 15

4.2 新机器防腐 4.3 对暂时停止的机器进行防腐

4.2.1 标准防腐 如果机器是暂时停止，则必须进行记录。

应根据制造商 (GD Nash)
通过防腐剂和生产技术措施对机器进行标准化防 的要求提供这一记录。
腐，最多能够存放 4 个月。
Pos: 35 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren - Edelstahlmaschinen @ 8\mod_1344246512605_54858.doc @ 64350 @ 3 @ 1

4.3.1 不锈钢机器防腐
4.2.2 长期防腐
1. 取下排放塞，将机器排空。
2. 旋转机器，应尽可能将机器排空。
如果机器在发货时采用海运包装，则意味着采用
了硅胶气密焊接，机器在严格遵循存放条件时最 3. 拧上排放塞。
多能够保持防腐状态 8 个月。 4. 在所有外露的已加工金属表面（例如法兰和轴表
面）上喷涂适当的防锈剂（例如 Houthon’s
Rust Veto #342 或 Cortec VCI
为了使机器在这 8 个月之后再延续 8
369）。遵循干燥时间。
个月的防腐状态，应采取以下措施：
– 对于带填料盒的机器：拧下填料压盖并取出
1. 打开海运包装。
密装圈。
2. 给机器填充三分之一（在系统中加入二分之一）
– 清除过量的水。
的防腐剂。
– 在包装部分的轴表面上涂上适当的防锈剂（
3. 手动将轴旋转 15 - 20 次。
例如 Houthon’s Rust Veto #342）。
4. 重新粘贴并焊接法兰和开口。
– 放入新的密装圈并重新安装填料箱。
5. 放入足够的干燥剂以及新的湿度指示器。
5. 每 4 周手动将转子旋转 5 - 10 次。
6. 重新将机器进行气密焊接。 Pos: 36 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren - Grauguss/Stahl @ 8\mod_1344246620093_54858.doc @ 64369 @ 3 @ 1

7. 记录步骤 1 - 6。 4.3.2 灰口铸铁机器或钢质机器的防腐

1. 取下排放塞，将机器排空。
在整个储存期间，每个月检查一次并记录：
2. 手动旋转驱动轴 5 - 10 次，以排空剩余液体。
 检查薄膜是否完好
3. 拧上排放塞。
 检查湿度指示器的变化
4. 通过法兰和观察孔给机器添加三分之一（系统添
 在薄膜损坏或者指示器发生变化时，执行步骤 1
加二分之一）的防腐剂（ 第 9.2.13 章，第
- 6。
54 页）。
5. 手动将轴旋转 5 - 10 次。
在 16
6. 储存时请放上法兰盖板并使用胶带密封。
个月之后这一措施将不再适合为机器提供继续的
防腐保护。 7. 在所有外露的已加工金属表面（例如法兰和轴表
 每 2 周手动将转子旋转 5 - 10 面）上喷涂适当的防锈剂（例如 Houthon’s
次。期间每四次补注一次防腐剂。 Rust Veto #342 或 Cortec VCI
369）。遵循干燥时间。
– 对于带填料盒的机器：拧下填料压盖并取出
Pos: 34 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservieren vorübergehend - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344246382131_54858.doc @ 64331 @ 2 @ 1

密装圈。
– 清除过量的水。
– 在包装部分的轴表面上涂上适当的防锈剂（
例如 Houthon’s Rust Veto #342）。
– 放入新的密装圈并重新安装填料箱。
8. 每 2 周手动将转子旋转 5 - 10
次。期间每四次补注一次防腐剂。
Pos: 37 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Lagern @ 8\mod_1344246711300_54858.doc @ 64388 @ 2 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 16

4.4 存放

提示

非专业的存放将造成财产损坏！

 机器应当正确防腐和保存。

1. 确保仓库满足以下条件：
– 干燥
– 无霜
– 无震动
– 平整
2. 按照防腐指南旋转转子。（ 第 4.2 章，第 16
页；第 4.3 章，第 16 页）。
Pos: 38 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Konservierung entfernen @ 8\mod_1344246785678_54858.doc @ 64407 @ 2 @ 1

4.5 清除防腐剂
1. 确保防腐剂与工作液体和输送介质的兼容性。
2. 必要时在调试机器之前进行冲洗。
Pos: 39 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/04 Transport, Lagerung und Entsorgung/Entsorgen @ 8\mod_1344246838336_54858.doc @ 64426 @ 2 @ 1

4.6 废物处理

塑料件可能会受到有毒或者放射性输送介质/工
作液体的污染，仅依赖清洁并不能解决问题。

警告

输送介质和工作液体导致中毒和环境污染！

 在机器上从事任何工作都必须佩戴保护装置。

 在对机器进行废物处理之前：
– 收集流出的输送介质、工作液体、油和轴承中
溢出的油脂，并按照当地的有效规定分别进行
用后处理。
– 中和机器中残留的输送介质和工作液体。
– 清除防腐剂（ 第 4.5 章，第 17 页）。

 拆除塑料薄膜，并根据当地适用的规定处理。

 按照当地的有效规定对机器进行废物处理。
Pos: 40 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Aufstellung und Anschluss @ 8\mod_1344247368451_54858.doc @ 64445 @ 1 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 17

 5.1.3 准备安装地

5 安装和连接
提示
在机器处于有爆炸危险的区域时（ 第 1.2
在低温下安装时注意存在结冻危险！
章，第 6 页）。
 确保不会有水进入机器和已连接的管道中。

提示  确保安装地点满足以下条件：
– 机器各侧都保持畅通。
若轴承中张力过大或电流通过将造成财产损失！ – 为管道的拆卸/安装、维护和修理工作，尤其
是机器及电机的拆卸/安装预留足够空间。
 不得对机组或机器外罩进行任何结构更改。
– 不能让任何外部振动对机器造成影响（损害
 不得在机组或机器外罩上进行任何焊接工作。 轴承）
– 防冻措施
– 按照当地有效规定进行接地，必要时还需遵
提示 守防爆保护的相关规定（ 第 1.2 章，第
6 页）。
存在损坏轴承的危险！
5.1.4 检查地基
 注意操作说明书。

 用于保护圆柱滚子轴承（如果有的话）的转子锁定 放置方法：
装置不得提前取下。 – 地基/钢筋结构
– 基础垫块
 不得在轴承上悬挂吊车钢绳。

 使用丙酮清除轴承末端的防腐漆。不要采用刮削或
 确保地基满足以下条件：
者研磨的方式。接着给轴承末端涂脂。
– 平整
– 清洁（无油、无尘以及其它杂质）
提示 – 能够承受机器自重和所有的生产动力
– 确保机组的站立稳定性
杂质将造成财产损失！
5.1.5 清除防腐剂
 只有在将管道连接到机器上时才能取下盖板、运输
盖板和封盖。  如果机器在安装和连接后直接投入运行：安装前
清除防腐剂（ 第 4.5 章，第 17 页）。

5.1.6 平衡转子
Pos: 41 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Aufstellung vorbereiten @ 8\mod_1344257750243_54858.doc @ 64464 @ 2333333 @ 1

5.1 准备安装
按照 DIN ISO 8821 平衡转子。
5.1.1 检查机器状态 DIN ISO 8821
需要与所使用方法相符的零件标识。在平衡之后
1. 检查机器和元件有无损坏。 ，必须在滑键槽附近轴的正面标注以下字母。
2. 检查转子的灵活性。
3. 检查机器内部有无异物。为此需要取下运输盖板 方法 标识
并检查内部空间有无异物。 半滑键 (half key) H

5.1.2 检查环境条件 全滑键 (full key) F

无滑键 (no key) N
 确保必要的环境条件（ 第 9.2.1 章，第 48
页）。 表6 平衡后的轴标识

Pos: 42 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Mit Fundament/Stahlkonstruktion aufstellen @ 8\mod_1344342821608_54858.doc @ 64490 @ 2333 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 18

5.2 使用地基/钢筋结构搭建 5.3 使用基础垫块搭建

提示

机座张紧时可能会造成损坏！

 将机座如下固定在地基/钢筋结构上。

5.2.1 准备地基/钢筋结构

1. 使用水平仪检查地基/钢筋结构的水平校准状况。
2. 在不够精确时可以使用例如板材加以平衡，从而
形成一个最大公差为 T 的支承面。

计算公差 T：
T = 0.0005 * (L + B)
T = 水平公差 (ISO 1101)
L = 机座总长度
B = 机座总宽度 图 6 使用基础垫块搭建
[mm 或 Zoll] 1 校准框架
5.2.2 固定机座 2 机器楔
3 支架使用木材或钢材
普通的混凝土在硬化时会收缩，不适合用于机座 4 原始基座
的水泥灌浆和浇注。 5 开口（使用碎布片，泡沫塑料或类似物品填
 仅使用基础混凝土。 充）
6 基础垫块
1. 将机座放置在地基/钢筋结构上。 1. 地基上配备有适当间距的钻孔。尺寸图中的尺寸
2. 机座不能在收缩性的基础混凝土上灌浆。 （ 第 1.2 章，第 6 页）。
3. 对于箱式结构的机座：使用基础混凝土浇铸机座 2. 制作校准框架。
。 机器的尺寸和固定点与机座一致。
4. 让基础混凝土粘结并硬化。 3. 在校准框架上固定基础垫块并精确校准。
5. 使用地脚螺栓或基础螺栓固定机座。 4. 将校准框架放置在地基上。这时需要将基础垫块
引入地基的钻孔中。
5.2.3 将机器放置在机座上 5. 使用水平仪检查水平校准情况。
6. 在不够精确时加以平衡，从而形成一个最大公差
提示 为 T 的支承面。

不正确的校准将造成财物损失！ 计算公差 T：
T = 0.0005 * (L + B)
 精确平衡高度。
T = 水平公差 (ISO 1101)
 校准动力总成系统。 L = 机座总长度
B = 机座总宽度
1. 提升机器（ 第 0 章，第 5 页）。 [mm 或 Zoll]
2. 将机器放置在机座上。 7. 在地基中使用基础混凝土浇注钻孔。
3. 确保机器平稳的放置在四个支脚上。必要时使用 8. 让基础混凝土粘结并硬化。
板材来平衡支脚和机座之间的间距。 9. 取下校准框架。
4. 使用螺栓将机器支脚固定在机座上。 10. 将机器放置在基础垫块上。
Pos: 43 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Mit Fundamentklötzen aufstellen @ 8\mod_1344343270796_54858.doc @ 64509 @ 2 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 19

 提示 5.5 设计管道

不正确的校准将造成财物损失！ 典型管道线路（ 第 9.1.7 章，第 43 页）。

 精确平衡高度。

 校准动力总成系统。

11. 确保机器平稳的放置在 4 注意输送介质、工作液体、允许压力的技术数据

个支脚上。必要时使用板材来平衡支脚和基础垫 （吸气压力、压缩压力和挤压力）（ 第 9.2
块之间的间距。 章，第 48 页）。

12. 使用螺栓将机器支脚固定在基础垫块上。
Pos: 44 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Motor montieren @ 8\mod_1344343857512_54858.doc @ 64528 @ 2 @ 1

5.5.1 铺设支撑物和法兰接口
5.4 安装电机

注意制造商的安装和操作说明。 提示

对机器管道施加过大的力和扭矩时可能会造成财物损
失！

 不能超过允许的数值（ 第 9.2.14 章，第 55

提示 页）。

撞击可能会造成财物损失！ 1. 计算管道力并且注意所有运行状态：

 在推动时不要使半联轴节倾斜。 – 冷/热
– 空/满
 对机器构件不能造成任何撞击。
– 无压力/已施加压力
1. 在机器和电机轴的末端涂上很薄的二硫化钼（例 – 法兰位置变化
如摩力克（molykote））。 2. 确保管道支架能够持久滑动，并且不会失灵。
2. 放入滑键。
5.5.2 确定管道内径
3. 无螺栓安装设备。取下橡胶缓冲块，并将半联轴
节温度升高至大约 100 °C。
管道中的流动阻力应尽可能低。
4. 推开机器和电机侧的半联轴节，直至轴末端与联
轴节轮毂齐平。此时应保持半联轴节之间规定的
间距（ 第 1.2 章，第 6
页，联轴节安装说明）。 1. 确保吸气管道额定宽度 ≥
5. 在电机处使用合适的垫板平衡电机轴末端的高度 吸气管接头额定宽度。
。 2. 确保压力管道额定宽度 ≥
6. 拧入电机螺栓，但是不要拧紧。 压力管接头额定宽度。
Pos: 45 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Rohrleitungen planen @ 8\mod_1344344038692_54858.doc @ 64547 @ 2333 @ 1

5.5.3 引流泄漏物

警告

危险的输送介质和工作液体会造成受伤和中毒危险！

 安全收集泄漏物，实现环保引流和处理。

1. 为泄漏物安排收集和引流装置。
2. 确保泄漏物质能够容易排出。
Pos: 46 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Sicherheits- und Kontrolleinrichtungen vorsehen @ 8\mod_1344344301963_54858.doc @ 64566 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 20

5.5.4 安装安全和控制装置（推荐） 5.6 连接管道
在机器处于有爆炸危险的区域时（ 第 1.2
5.6.1 避免管道污染
章，第 6 页）。

提示
避免污染
将机器与管道系统相连时可能造成财物损失！
提示 管道中的焊接残余（又小又硬的金属片）可能会对机
器造成严重损害。
在工作液体含有石灰时可能会由于石灰沉积而造成损
 如果有的话，确保在安装机器时将随附的起动筛放
害！
置在法兰的管道系统处。
剥落的石灰层可能会造成腐蚀。
 吸气管道中没有残留物时，可在运行 3 - 4
 添加水软化剂或是安装离子交换器。 周后取下起动筛（如果有）。

 在使用期间应定期清洁起动筛（如果有）。
1. 将随附的筛子装入到工作液体管道中。
2. 为了监控污染情况，必要时可以安装一个带接触
式压力计的压差指示器。
避免回流
提示

 通过吸气管道中的止回阀确保工作液体或是气体 机器污染可能会造成财物损失！
在断开之后不会回流到机器中。
 确保没有任何污染物进入机器。
能够分离和闭锁管道

1. 在组装前应清洁所有管道件和龙头。
用于维护和维修工作。
2. 确保法兰垫圈没有向内伸出。
3. 清除法兰上的盲法兰、堵头、保护膜和/或防护漆
。
 在吸入和压力管道中安装闭锁装置。
能够测量运行状态 5.6.2 安装工作液体管道

1. 为测量压力在吸入和压力管道中安装压力计。 1. 取下机器上的运输盖板和封盖。

2. 在电机侧安装负载监视器（过载或未满载）。 2. 安装工作液体管道。

3. 在机器侧安装温度测量装置。 3. 确保密封件在内部不会凸出。

4. 要测量工作液体流量，应根据流动方向安装流量 5.6.3 安装辅助管道（如果有）

测量仪。
Pos: 47 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Rohrleitungen anschließen @ 8\mod_1344345480623_54858.doc @ 64585 @ 233333 @ 1

注意辅助运行系统的制造商说明（例如端面密封
供给系统）。

1. 将辅助管道无应力且密封地安装在辅助接口上（
→ 安装图纸）。
2. 避免形成气泡：管道应始终相对于机器向上敷设
。

5.6.4 安装吸气管道

1. 取下机器上的运输盖板和封盖。
2. 安装吸气管道。
3. 确保密封件在内部不会凸出。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 21

5.6.5 安装压力管道 5.7.1 连接电机

1. 取下机器上的运输盖板和封盖。
注意电机的制造商说明。
2. 安装压力管道。
3. 确保密封件在内部不会凸出。
Pos: 48 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Kompressorbetrieb: Umgehungsleitung anschließen @ 8\mod_1344345733139_54858.doc @ 64604 @ 3 @ 1

5.6.6 压缩机运行：连接旁通管 1. 按照接线图连接电机。

2. 确保不出现电能源引起的危害。
 给旁通管安装滑阀，以便能够无压力启动机器。
Pos: 49 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Spannungsfreien Rohrleitungsanschluss prüfen @ 8\mod_1344345817951_54858.doc @ 64623 @ 33 @ 1
3. 安装紧急停机开关。
5.6.7 检查无张力的管道连接
Pos: 51 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Kupplung feinausrichten @ 8\mod_1344346394217_54858.doc @ 64661 @ 2 @ 1

5.8 精细校准联轴节
 铺设并冷却管道
建议由 GD Nash 的售后服务人员校准联轴节。
提示

机器外壳夹紧时可能会造成财物损失！

 确保所有的管道都无压力连接在机器上。
Pos: 52 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Berührungsschutz montieren @ 8\mod_1344346443045_54858.doc @ 64680 @ 2 @ 1

5.9 安装接触保护装置
1. 将管道的连接法兰与机器分离。
1. 按照 DIN EN 294
2. 检查，管道是否能向所有方向在预期的延伸范围
在自行移动的部件上安装接触保护装置。
内自由活动：
2. 不能将易受温度变化影响的构件或管道固定在热
– 额定宽度 < 150 mm (5.9 inch)：手动
的机器零件上。
– 额定宽度 > 150 mm Pos: 53 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Nach Montage prüfen @ 8\mod_1344346689451_54858.doc @ 64699 @ 2 @ 1

(5.9 inch)：使用小手柄 5.10 在安装后检查

3. 确保法兰排列成平行平面。
4. 将管道的连接法兰再次固定在机器上。 必要时需要按照附加说明或是设备特定的状况进
行进一步的检测。
5.6.8 检查管道的密封性

 在管道连接时检查整个系统的密封性，例如超压  确保：
0.5 bar 的内卡检漏。
Pos: 50 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/05 Aufstellung und Anschluss/Elektrisch anschließen @ 8\mod_1344346227217_54858.doc @ 64642 @ 23 @ 1 – 驱动电机已正确设置并在轴向进行无推力安
装。
5.7 电气连接
– 无需接触叶轮即可使其旋转。
– 旋转部件已经正确的加以保护，防止接触。
危险
– 管道安装件和仪表均已正确放置、无应力安
电击会造成生命危险！ 装并已经检查压力。
– 现有的热交换器已经排空。
 在电气系统上的工作只能由专业电工完成。
– 当前的增压泵已做好运行准备。
– 旁边的分离器（如果有）处于正确的安装高
度并配有指定的仪表。
危险 Pos: 54 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/UEB_Betrieb @ 8\mod_1344347712936_54858.doc @ 64718 @ 1 @ 1

旋转的零件将引起生命危险！

 在进行任何安装和维护工作时都必须切断电机电压
并锁定。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 22

 6.1.5 加注工作液体
6 运行  辅助操作系统准备就绪
Pos: 55 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Inbetriebnahme vorbereiten @ 8\mod_1344347962026_54858.doc @ 64737 @ 233333 @ 1

6.1 准备调试 警告

本段落适用于清空并且干燥的机器（即在较长时 危险的介质会造成受伤和中毒危险！
间的运行中断或修理后的首次运行或再次运行）
。  安全接收溢出的介质并进行环保式的废物处理。

 所有用于输送介质和工作液体的管道都已经正确
连接。 提示
 所有的滑阀和阀门都已关闭。
干燥运转将造成财产损失！
6.1.1 确定机器配置
 确保机器已经正确加注工作液体。
 确定机器配置（→ 订单数据单）。
 确保所有接口和连接密封。
机器配置包括真空泵、压缩机、轴密封类型、材 Pos: 56 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Betriebsflüssigkeitsstand vor dem Anfahren einstellen @ 8\mod_1344348740933_54858.doc @ 64756 @ 3 @ 1

料类型。 6.1.6 在启动前设置工作液体液位

机器的工作液体液面在启动时不允许超过轴中部
6.1.2 清除防腐剂 。

仅在已做防腐处理的机器上为必要。
对于带自动排出装置的机器

1. 打开用于工作液体的闭锁阀组。
机器工作区自行加注到压力管接头或预焊接法兰
 （ 第 4.5 章，第 17 页）。 处的溢出高度。
6.1.3 润滑轴承 2. 一旦零件清空接口（预焊接法兰）处没有液体流
出，就启动机器。
带油脂润滑滚子轴承的机器在发货时即已处于运 对于旁接有分离器的机器
行准备状态。
 分离器已正确安装
 如果机器在调试前已经放置超过 2  在分离器中与机器齐平的位置安装了液位监控装
年时间：重新润滑轴承（ 第 3.3 章，第 12 置
页）。  在所需的液位之下安装了平衡管和构件
6.1.4 准备辅助操作系统（若配备）  必要时在最大液位高度安装分离器溢流口
1. 打开机器和分离器之间的闭锁阀组。
由于安装或使用第三方或未经允许的辅助操作系
2. 通过分离器给机器加注工作液体。
统而造成的损坏，制造商不承担任何责任。
3. 通过溢流口处的液位监控装置或液体出口检查液
位。
密封供应系统 4. 一旦达到正确液位，就启动机器。
Pos: 57 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Sperrflüssigkeit für Wellendichtung einstellen @ 8\mod_1344348917230_54858.doc @ 64775 @ 3 @ 1

1. 确保密封介质适于与输送介质和工作介质混合。
2. 确定密封操作系统：
– （ 订单数据单）
3. 安装密封操作系统（ 制造商说明）。
4. 对于已安装的密封操作系统应确定必要的参数。
5. 在锁定压力系统中应确保不会超过所允许的容器
压力（ 制造商说明）。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 23

6.1.7 设置用于轴密封的封闭液体 6.2 投入运行
对于带自冲洗的填料盒： Pos: 60 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Einschalten - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344349485386_54858.doc @ 64832 @ 3 @ 1

6.2.1 启动
填料盒必须始终保持轻微的泄漏，以导出摩擦热
量并用于润滑。  已正确安装和连接机器
如果有必要，将前几个小时中不断增加的泄漏量
调回原样。
 已正确安装和连接电机
 电机已根据机器正确校准
 确保有足够的泄漏液体溢出：
 所有的接口都无电压并且密封连接
– 真空泵：每秒 1-2 滴
– 压缩机：持续滴下，直至形成连续的细流
 当前的辅助操作系统已准备就绪（如果有）
对于带外部冲洗的填料盒：  已安装全部安全装置并检查功能
1. 打开用于封闭液体的阀门，以润湿填料套。  已正确准备好机器
2. 根据操作点设置供给压力。  给机器加注工作液体直至轴中部
3. 确保流出足够的泄漏液体用于之后冷却填料套：  轴密封件已浸湿
– 真空泵：每秒 1-2 滴
– 压缩机：持续滴下，直至形成连续的细流
危险
在端面密封中：
运转的机器会造成受伤危险！
 打开用于封闭液体的阀门，以短时间润湿端面密  不要接触正在运转的机器。
封。
 确保已安装联轴节保护装置。
Pos: 58 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Drehrichtung prüfen @ 8\mod_1344349140371_54858.doc @ 64794 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.8 检查旋转方向
 不能在正在运转的机器上工作。
 已正确设置机器外壳中的工作液体液位。  在机器上工作前应让机器完全冷却。
 填料盒是潮湿的
 对于带外部冲洗的端面密封：用于封闭液体的阀
门暂时打开。 危险
 检查旋转方向。
Pos: 59 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/UEB_In Betrieb nehmen @ 8\mod_1344349433574_54858.doc @ 64813 @ 2 @ 1
喷出的输送介质和工作液体可能造成受伤和中毒危险
！

 在机器上从事任何工作都必须佩戴人员保护装置。

提示

干燥运转将造成财产损失！

 确保机器已经正确加注工作液体。

 在启动前直接设置工作液体的液位（ 第 6.1.6
章，第 23 页）。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 24

 泵运行：启动
提示
建议首次运行由 GD Nash
抑制吸气流量时存在空穴危险！ 的售后服务人员完成。
 完全打开吸气侧的装备，并且不要将其用于输送流
量的调节。
1. 打开吸气管道的滑阀。
2. 对于带外部冲洗的轴密封：
打开用于封闭液体的阀门。
提示
3. 接通驱动电机。
接通后：立即打开用于工作液体的阀门。
超出最大压缩压力时有可能造成财物损失！
4. 调节用于工作液体的阀门：
 机器不能持续对着已关闭的压力侧或吸气侧仪表运
– 使用流量测量：打开用于工作液体的阀门，
行。
直至流量仪显示所需的数值（ 第 9.2.9
章，第 50
Pos: 61 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Kompressorbetrieb anfahren @ 8\mod_1344349761668_54858.doc @ 64851 @ @ 1

页）。在达到最终的吸气压力后重新修正流
压缩机运行：启动
量。

建议首次运行由 GD Nash – 使用压力测量：设置用于工作液体的阀门，

的售后服务人员完成。 使得在启动状态下压力测量仪显示大约 1.0
bar 的绝对值。
5. 对于带自冲洗的填料盒：
需要轻微渗漏。检查设置，必要时修正。
无压力启动机器。 6. 对于带外部冲洗的填料盒：通过用于封闭液体的
阀门来调节所需的封闭液体压力/流量。
7. 对于带外部冲洗的端面密封：（ 第 1.2
章，第 6 页）。
1. 关闭压力管道和吸气管道的滑阀。 Pos: 63 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Betrieb kontrollieren @ 8\mod_1344350693761_54858.doc @ 64889 @ 3 @ 1

2. 打开旁通管的滑阀。 6.2.2 检查运行

3. 对于带外部冲洗的轴密封：
打开用于封闭液体的阀门。 在首次调试之后应检查运行是否正常，并在之后
定期检查。
4. 接通驱动电机。
接通后：立即打开用于工作液体的阀门。
5. 打开吸气管道的滑阀。 1. 在调试后读取并记录设定的压力和流量。
6. 借助流量仪调节用于工作液体的阀门（ 第 2. 检查并记录介质（工作液体和封闭液体）和构件
9.2.9 章，第 50 页）。 （轴承、轴密封）的温度，直至达到稳定状态。
7. 塞住旁通管的滑阀，直至达到理想的工作压力。 3. 在出现空穴危险时：观察机器是否出现哒哒声和
8. 对于带自冲洗的填料盒： 噼啪声。
需要轻微渗漏。检查设置，必要时修正。 4. 出现异常时确定原因并排除（ 第 8 章，第 33
9. 对于带外部冲洗的填料盒： 页）。
通过用于封闭液体的阀门来调节所需的封闭液体
Pos: 64 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Ausschalten - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344350761089_54858.doc @ 64908 @ 3 @ 1

压力/流量。
10. 对于带外部冲洗的端面密封：（ 第 1.2
章，第 6 页）
11. 打开压力管道的滑阀
12. 关闭旁通管的滑阀。
13. 必要时再次调节用于工作液体和封闭液体的阀门
。
Pos: 62 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Pumpenbetrieb anfahren @ 8\mod_1344349904918_54858.doc @ 64870 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 25

6.2.3 关闭 工作液体特性 运行中断的持续时间
（与操作过程相关）

警告 短
固体沉淀  冲洗机器。 固体沉淀
热的机器零件可能造成受伤危险！ 已经凝固/结冻，  加热或清空 已经凝固/结冻，
 在机器上从事任何工作都必须佩戴人员保护装置。 但是没有腐蚀危 机器。 但是没有腐蚀危
险 险
Pos: 65 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Kompressorbetrieb ausschalten @ 8\mod_1344350890871_54858.doc @ 64927 @ @ 1
已经凝固/结冻，  加热或清空 已经凝固/结冻，
压缩机运行：关闭 并且有腐蚀危险 机器。 并且有腐蚀危险
1. 缓慢打开旁通管的滑阀。 仍然是液态，但 – 仍然是液态，但
2. 关闭压力管道的滑阀。 是没有腐蚀危险 是没有腐蚀危险

3. 在大约 1 分钟后关闭吸气管道的滑阀。 仍然是液态，并 – 仍然是液态，并

且有腐蚀危险 且有腐蚀危险
4. 关闭驱动电机。
5. 关闭用于工作液体的阀门。 表8 措施取决于工作液体的特性
6. 关闭用于封闭液体的阀门。 存在霜冻危险时应清空
7. 关闭旁通管的滑阀。 1. 打开排放阀，使液体流出机器、分离器和管道。
Pos: 66 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/06 Betrieb/Pumpenbetrieb ausschalten @ 8\mod_1344350947027_54858.doc @ 64946 @ @ 1

泵运行：关闭 2. 安全接收溢出的液体并进行环保式的废物处理。
1. 关闭驱动电机。 3. 在机器无压力时松开侧面铭牌处用于全部清空的
堵头。
2. 关闭用于工作液体的阀门。
4. 安全接收溢出的液体并进行环保式的废物处理。
3. 关闭用于封闭液体的阀门。
5. 在端面密封中：完全排出所有密封腔中的液体。
4. 关闭吸气管道的滑阀。
Pos: 67 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Außer Betrieb nehmen @ 8\mod_1344351021058_54858.doc @ 64965 @ 2 @ 1

6. 安全接收溢出的液体并进行环保式的废物处理。
6.3 停止运行
Pos: 68 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/06 Betrieb/Wieder in Betrieb nehmen @ 8\mod_1344351664527_54858.doc @ 64984 @ 2 @ 1

6.4 重新投入运行
 机器已关闭并且无压力
1. 在运行中断 > 1
警告 年时，再次投入运行时应重新润滑轴承。
2. 所有的操作步骤都和调试时一样（ 第 5.10
危险的介质会造成受伤和中毒危险！ 章，第 22 页）。

 安全接收溢出的介质并进行环保式的废物处理。 第 6.2 章，第 24 页

Pos: 69 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Wartung und Instandhaltung - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344351939270_54858.doc @ 65003 @ 1 @ 1

 运行中断时采取下列措施：

机器将被： 措施
长时间放置  根据工作液体的不同采取措
施。

清空  关闭吸入侧和压力侧的阀门
。

拆卸  拆开电机并防止未经许可的
启动。

储存  注意储存措施（ 第 4.4
章，第 17 页）。

表7 运行中断时的措施

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 26

 7.1.1 检查

7 维护和修理 在首次调试时，应在运行大约 150

小时后进行首次常规检查。
在机器处于有爆炸危险的区域时（ 第 1.2 在运行大约 5
章，第 6 页）。 小时后进行皮带传动的首次检查。
检查包括如下步骤：
1. 确保输送介质和工作液体中没有明显的脏污。
有专业培训的客户服务安装工人可供完成安装和 2. 确保满足规定的技术数据（功耗、温度等）。
维修。在有需求时可提供一份输送物料证明（
3. 确保没有任何泄漏（例外：填料套需要有一定的
第 9.3 章，第 56 页）。
泄漏）。

Pos: 70 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Überwachen @ 8\mod_1344352043141_54858.doc @ 65022 @ 2 @ 1

4. 检查机器在运行时是否安静，且轴承的运行噪音
没有出现日益严重的情况。
7.1 监测
5. 检查地基是否有下沉或裂纹。
6. 确保阀门、过滤器和筛子上没有异物。必要时清
推荐的时间间隔是实现正常运行的前提。
洁。
出现故障时应立即进行检查和修正。
7. 检查管道、仪表和容器是否固定、密封。
8. 检查连接元件，必要时再次拧紧。
9. 检查安全系统。
检查间隔取决于机器的使用情况。
10. 在皮带传动中：检查皮带预张力，必要时修正。
11. 在确定出现了不允许的偏差和变动时，应予以排
除。
12. 根据确定的污染和磨损状况确定修整日期。
危险 Pos: 72 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Revision @ 8\mod_1344352543779_54858.doc @ 65060 @ 3 @ 1

7.1.2 修整
运转的机器会造成受伤危险！
在运行条件有利时，修正再润滑和油脂更换的期
 不要接触正在运转的机器。 限（ 第 7.1.3 章，第 28 页）。
 不能在正在运转的机器上工作。

1. 执行检查步骤（ 第 7.1.1 章，第 27 页）。

2. 检查叶轮校准是否在规定公差内。
警告
3. 确保所有的固定螺栓都已拧紧（填料盒例外）。
Pos: 73 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Wälzlager mit Fettschmierung @ 8\mod_1346396130591_54858.doc @ 69180 @ 3 @ 1

危险的输送介质会造成受伤和中毒危险！

 在机器上从事任何工作都必须佩戴人员保护装置。

 为实现无故障运行应确保：
– 不能干燥运转
– 密封性能
– 无空穴
– 过滤器没有堵塞并且干净
– 没有异常的运行噪音和振动
– 在轴密封上没有不允许的泄漏情况
– 如果填料压盖在运行较长时间后无法再次校
准，则检查填料盒的设置并更换填料套（
第 7.1.5 章，第 28 页）。
Pos: 71 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Inspektion @ 8\mod_1344352245065_54858.doc @ 65041 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 27

7.1.3 采用油脂润滑的滚子轴承 7.1.5 填料盒

可用油脂（ 第 9.2.11 章，第 54 页）。 建议由 GD Nash

的售后服务人员进行填料套的更换和重新设置。

拆卸填料套
再润滑之后轴承温度会明显增加，必须在启动阶
段后再次下降到正常值。

使用再润滑装置润滑
1. 清洁注油嘴。
2. 使用涂脂枪注入规定的数量。
这时应均匀旋转轴。

如果没有再润滑装置（注油嘴），则采取以下方式：
图 8 移除密装圈
1. 用润滑脂注满轴承的空腔。
这时应留出轴承盖的空间，以便油脂溢出。 1 密装圈
2. 卸下轴向轴密封环。 2 填料抽取器
10 套环
3. 给轴向轴密封环的滑面涂上油脂。
1. 将挡油环和 V 形圈从填料密封件上推开。
4. 对于外部的轴密封环：
2. 取下填料压盖的固定螺栓和螺母。
安装轴向轴密封环，使得轴承盖正面与轴向轴密
封环的外边缘齐平。必要时使用安装辅助垫圈。 3. 在单片式填料压盖中：将压盖尽可能远的推离密
封区域。
4. 在分离式填料压盖中：松开两部分并从轴上取下
。
5. 将填料抽取器拧入密装圈中。
6. 将密装圈从密封区域拉出。

图 9 套环拔出器（3.2 mm (1/8 in.)钢丝）

7. 在密封区域引入两个拔出器。在密装圈之间旋入
图 7 安装辅助垫圈 拔出器，直至弯曲的末端钩在相对的两个位置上
5. 对于内部的轴密封环： 。
按照第 9.1.6 章，第 40 8. 将套环从密封区域拉出。
页中的信息安装轴向轴密封环。
Pos: 74 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Gleitringdichtungen @ 8\mod_1344353085503_54858.doc @ 65117 @ 3 @ 1
9. 使用填料抽取器清除剩余的密装圈。
7.1.4 端面密封 10. 彻底清洁填料区域。

 注意附加说明书（ 第 1.2 章，第 6 页）。

Pos: 75 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Stopfbuchspackungen @ 8\mod_1344409004970_54858.doc @ 65140 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 28

装入新的填料套 1. 填料滑阀 3
使用两条硬橡胶制作而成，适用于轴的外直径与
填料区域的内直径之间的区域。
2. 密装圈的内直径使用摩力克（molykote）G-N
油脂膏或类似润滑剂涂覆。
3. 通过轴向推动两端以螺旋方式打开密装圈
( A)。
4. 将密装圈环绕轴放置并引入密封区域 ( B)。
5. 借助填料滑阀将密装圈压入填料区域。
确保密装圈平稳放置在填料区域正面 ( C)。
6. 将相邻密装圈的接缝偏转 180°装入 ( D)。
7. 如果有套环的话将其装入 ( D)。
8. 放入剩下的密装圈 ( E)。
应确保满足以下条件：
– 接缝已偏转 180°。
– 密装圈已经固定并均匀的安装。
9. 在分离式填料压盖中：
将分离式填料压盖环绕轴放置，并使用螺母、垫
圈和螺栓连接
( F)。将填料压盖放在轴上，必要时推动定位
螺栓（如果有的话），直至压盖与上一密装圈齐
平。
10. 在单片式填料压盖中：
将填料压盖放在轴上，必要时推动定位螺栓（如
果有的话），直至压盖与上一密装圈齐平。
11. 手动拧紧填料压盖的螺栓和螺母。
12. 启动机器（ 第 6.2.1 章，第 24
页）。运行期间，检查密封室的温度以及是否泄
漏。
13. 必要时：在机器停止时包装，使机器静止，卸下
护栅，进行包装，安装护栅并重新启动机器。
14. 重复步骤 12 和
13，直到达到指定的泄漏量（ 第 6.1.7
章，第 24 页）。
Pos: 76 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Maschine reinigen @ 8\mod_1344410121283_54858.doc @ 65159 @ 3 @ 1

图 10 装入新的填料套

1 密装圈
2 封闭液体接口
3 填料滑阀
10 套环
102 驱动侧
103 非驱动侧
102-1/ 103-1 定位螺栓
111 轴
112 填料压盖固定

将 F 视图旋转 90°以展示定位螺栓和螺母。
请仅使用 2 和 10。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 29

7.1.6 清洁机器 7.2 拆卸

小心 如拆卸方法错误，则 GD Nash
不承担任何责任。
使用压缩空气清洁可能造成受伤危险！

 注意正确吸气。

 使用人员保护装置。 危险

运转的机器会造成受伤危险！
提示  不要接触正在运转的机器。

不当清洁剂可能造成财物损失！  不能在正在运转的机器上工作。

 确保清洁剂与机器兼容。  在进行任何安装和维护工作时都必须切断电机电压
并锁定。

根据首次检查时确定的污染程度确定清洁间隔。
危险

电击会造成生命危险！
1. 为了冲出液体环中聚集的异物，应打开清空管道
的阀门。  在电气系统上的工作只能由专业电工完成。
2. 备选：旋出用于全部清空的堵头。
3. 用水冲洗机器。
警告
4. 清洁或更换管道中的筛子和过滤器。
这里应注意筛子或过滤器中倒出的污染物不要落
入机器中。 危险的输送介质会造成受伤和中毒危险！

 在机器上从事任何工作都必须佩戴人员保护装置。
清除石灰沉积
 在进行任何工作之前都必须使机器冷却。
清除石灰沉积的间隔时间取决于工作液体中的石  确保机器没有压力。
灰含量，并且间隔必须长于 6 个月。
建议由 GD Nash  清空机器，安全接收输送介质并进行环保式的废物
的售后服务人员完成石灰清除工作。 处理。

1. 使用适当的溶剂冲洗机器（ 第 9.2.12 章，第

54 页）。
警告
2. 用水冲洗机器。
Pos: 77 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Demontieren @ 8\mod_1344410411210_54858.doc @ 65178 @ 233 @ 1

过重的部件可能造成受伤危险！

 注意部件重量。使用适当的提升装置提升较重的部
件并运输。

 安全放置部件，防止翻转或滚动。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 30

 警告 7.3 安装

拆卸工作时可能会发生受伤危险！ 按照给定的标记重新集中安装部件，不要出现倾
斜。
 确保不意外打开压力侧阀门。 如安装方法错误，则 GD Nash
不承担任何责任。
 必要时排空闭锁压力设备的压力。

 戴上安全手套，由于磨损或损坏零件可能十分锋利
。 警告

 小心拆卸带弹簧的构件（例如端面密封、预张紧的 过重的部件可能造成受伤危险！
轴承、阀门），弹簧张力可能造成构件弹出。
 注意部件重量，使用适当的提升装置提升较重的部
 注意制造商说明（例如电机、联轴节、端面密封、 件并运输。
闭锁压力设备、万向轴、齿轮箱、皮带传动）。

警告
7.2.1 将机器发给制造商

安装时可能会发生受伤危险！
 机器无压力
弹簧张力可能造成部件弹出
 机器已完全清空
 小心安装带弹簧的部件（例如端面密封、预张紧的
 将电气连接断开并锁定电机，防止重启 轴承、阀门）。
 机器已冷却  注意制造商说明（例如电机、联轴节、端面密封、
 已拆除联轴节保护装置 闭锁压力设备、万向轴、齿轮箱、皮带传动）。

 辅助操作系统已停止，无压力并且已经清空
 压力计管道、压力计和支架已拆卸 提示
 机器和零件必须连同真实并以完整填写的安全证
明一起发给制造商（ 第 9.3 章，第 56 不合适的部件将引起财产损失！
页）。
 应始终使用相同强度的螺栓替换丢失或损坏的螺栓
7.2.2 准备拆卸 （ 第 9.2.4 章，第 48 页）。

 只能用相同材料的密封替换密封。
 机器无压力
 机器已完全清空、冲洗并消毒
1. 安装时注意：
 将电气连接断开并锁定电机，防止重启 – 用原厂配件替换磨损的部件。
 机器已冷却 – 替换密封件，装入时防止扭转。
 已拆除联轴节保护装置 – 遵守规定的拧紧力矩（ 第 9.2.4 章，第
48 页）。
 辅助操作系统已停止，无压力并且已经清空
2. 清洁所有零件（ 第 9.2.12 章，第 54
 压力计管道、压力计和支架已拆卸 页）。注意不要弄掉之前给定的标记。
 拆卸时注意： 3. 安装机器（ 第 9.1.2 章，第 38 页）。
– 拆卸前，准确标记所有部件的安装位置和方 4. 更换滚子轴承并加注油脂（ 第 7.1.3 章，第
位。 28 页）。
– 中央拆卸部件，不要使其倾斜。 5. 在系统中安装机器（ 第 5 章，第 18 页）。
– 拆卸机器（ 第 9.1.2 章，第 38 页）。
Pos: 79 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Ersatzteile bestellen @ 8\mod_1344411271176_54858.doc @ 65235 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 78 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/07 Wartung und Instandhaltung/Montieren @ 8\mod_1344410703145_54858.doc @ 65197 @ 2 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 31

7.4 订购备件

如果使用的零件非原装件，则 GD Nash
不承担任何责任。

应由 GD Nash 的售后服务人员完成修理工作。

 订购备件时应提供以下信息：
– 备件订购编号（根据备件清单）（ 第 1.2
章，第 6 页）。
 如果没有备件清单，则根据铭牌提供以下信息：
– 机器型号（ 第 3.1.1 章，第 11 页）
– 机器序列号（ 第 3.1.1 章，第 11 页）
– 机器制造年份（ 第 3.1.1 章，第 11
页）
– 零件号（根据图纸）（ 第 9.1.2 章，第
38 页）
Pos: 80 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/08 Störungsbehebung/Störungsbehebung - Einleitung @ 8\mod_1344411806144_54858.doc @ 65254 @ 1 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 32

8 故障排除 Pos: 82 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

下表中没有给出，或是按照给定的原因无法查清的故
障，应与制造商协商。
下表中为可能的故障给出了编号。通过编号能够在故
障表中找到相对应的原因和应对措施。
Pos: 81 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/08 Störungsbehebung/Zuordnung Störung/Nummer @ 8\mod_1344411865955_54858.doc @ 65273 @ @ 1

故障 编号
运行时有噪音 1
功耗过高 2
流量过低 3
外壳过热 4
轴承过热 5
轴承发出鸣音 6
轴承发出敲击声 7
没有达到真空 8
电机没有启动 9
主断路开关响应 10

表9 故障/编号分配
Pos: 83 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/08 Störungsbehebung/Störungstabelle @ 8\mod_1344411986316_54858.doc @ 65292 @ @ 1

故障编号 原因 排除
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X – – – – – – – – – 底板振动  使用基础混凝土浇铸底板（必要时包
括传动底座），或使用干燥的砂子填
充。
X – – – – – – – – – 机组振动  检查机组的对准和固定情况。
X – – – – – – – – – 管道振动  检查管道的固定情况。
X – – – – – – – – – 空穴 – 发出咔咔的噪音  使用冷的工作液体。必要时也可通过
增加二次空气来限制进气压力或是加
装空穴保护装置。
X X – – – – – – – – 间歇输送  抑制工作液体，直至间歇状况停止，
检查止回装置。
X X – – – – – – – – 吸气侧积压液体过多  抑制工作液体，必要时在吸气侧安装
预分离器。
X X – – – – – – – – 分离器位置过高  将分离器放置在较低处。
X X – – – – – – – – 叶轮在控制盘处磨光  打开观察孔盖，检查或修正缝隙设置
。
– X – – – – – – – – 填料盒过度拧紧  真空泵：松开填料压盖，使每秒有 1-
2 滴液体溢出。
 压缩机：松开填料压盖，使封闭液体
连续滴出直至成流。
– X – – – – – – – – 吸气侧固体掉落严重  定期或不断冲洗外壳，必要时放置集
尘器。
– X – – – – – – – – 转子固定不动  松开外壳螺栓，用手杆旋转转子，必
要时清洁真空泵和压缩机。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 33

故障编号 原因 排除
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
– X – – – – – – – – 电机保护装置启动  如果排除真空泵或压缩机出现故障，
检查电机保护装置和电机尺寸。
– X – – – – – – – – 外壳中出现腐蚀  更换外壳，必要时给其涂敷涂层，检
查材料的耐抗性，必要时过滤工作液
体。
– X – – – – – – – – 间歇性功率消耗  检查工作液体流量。
 检查止回阀组。
 通过吸气管道输送时一起输送的液体
过多：在吸气管道中安装预分离器。
– X X – – – – – – – 过压缩  检查设备，必要时修正吸气压力或压
缩压力。
– X X – – – – – – – 钙化或沉积  给机器除钙（ 第 9.2.12 章，第
54 页）。
 必要时拆卸并清洁机器。
 软化工作液体。
– X X – – – – – – – 测量仪显示错误  检查测量仪，必要时校准。
– X X – – – – – – – 压缩压力过高  检查设备。
– X X – – – – – – – 超出允许的最大压差  在吸气和压力测清除不必要的节流位
置（例如已关闭的管道、错误设置的
滑阀）。
– – X – – – – – – – 间隙损耗过高  如果有观察孔盖，将其打开。
 检查叶轮缝隙。
 修正外壳长度。
– – X – – – – – – – 吸气压力过低  检查设备，必要时提高吸气压力。
– – X – – – – – – – 内部不密封  拆卸真空泵或压缩器，检查密封面，
检查材料的耐抗性，在出现腐蚀时安
装新的零件。
– – X – – – – – – – 控制盘的阀板损坏  更换阀板。
– – X – – – – – – – 吸气侧不密封  检查吸气法兰上的密封件和吸气侧的
观察孔盖，必要时更新。
– – X – – – – – – – 填料盒不密封  真空泵：拧紧填料压盖，使每秒有 1-
2 滴液体溢出。
 压缩机：拧紧填料压盖，使封闭液体
连续滴出直至成流。
– – X X – – – – – – 工作液体过少  增加工作液体量或
压力。
– – X X – – – – – – 工作液体温度过高  降温或增加工作液体量。
– – – – X – – – – – 轴承中的油脂过多  清除过量的油脂。
– – – – X – – – – – 离合器受到挤压  更加精确的校准机器。
– – – – X – – – – – 皮带张力过大  降低皮带张力。
– – – – X – – – – – 轴承污染  清洁或更换轴承。检查密封件。
– – – – X – – – – – 环境温度超过极限值  使用高温油脂。
– – – – X X – – – – 润滑不足  按照规定润滑。

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 34

 故障编号 原因 排除
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
– – – – X X – – – – 轴承腐蚀  更换轴承，检查密封件。
– – – – – – X – – – 轴承滚动面出现剥落点  更换轴承。
– – – – – – X – – – 轴承滚动面出现划痕  更换轴承，在静止时避免振动。
– – – – – – – X – – 没有工作液体流入  检查工作液体的吸入管。
– – – – – – – X – – 空气进入系统  检查所有的接口和密封件，必要时再
次拧紧。
– – – – – – – X – – 旋转方向错误  通过更换电气连接调整旋转方向。
– – – – – – – X – – 机器内部零件磨损  卸下机器并更换损坏的零件。
– – – – – – – X – – 压力侧阀门损坏  更换阀门。
– – – – – – – – X – 一根或多根电线断开  检查固定装置、连接端子和电缆。
– – – – – – – – X – 叶轮卡住  拆卸机器。
 清空机器，进行脱钙并清洁。
 组装机器。
 检查叶轮、转子和外壳之间的缝隙并
正确调整。
– – – – – – – – – X 电机线圈短路  检查电机线圈。
– – – – – – – – – X 电机超负荷  降低工作液体的流量。
– – – – – – – – – X 压力管接头处的反压过高  降低反压。
– – – – – – – – – X 所设置的液体流量过高  减少液体量。

表10 故障表
Pos: 84 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1
Pos: 85 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/UEB_Anhang @ 8\mod_1344413522427_54858.doc @ 65311 @ 1 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 35

 部件编号 名称
9 附件 37.01 3)
挡板
3)
Pos: 86 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Teile-Nr. und Benennungen @ 8\mod_1344495708584_54858.doc @ 65969 @ 23 @ 1

37.02 阀板
9.1 图纸 37.03 3)
定距螺纹销
3)
37.04 六角螺母
9.1.1 备件清单
40.01 侧面铭牌
部件编号 名称 40.02 检视孔盖
10.01 叶轮 40.06 盲法兰，用于“提升工作液体流量”的入
口（“加强型冷却”）
10.02 轴
40.07 密封垫
10.03 滑键 DIN 6885
**)
40.10 盲法兰（吸气侧、下）
15.01 填料压盖
**)
40.12 盲法兰（压力侧、上）
15.02 套环
40.13 密封垫
15.03 填料套
40.14 六角螺栓
15.04 六角螺栓
40.15 六角螺栓
15.05 垫片
40.16 六角螺栓
15.06 用于轴密封的堵头（带外部冲洗）
40.17 六角螺母
15.07 PTFE 密封带
40.18 螺旋塞
20.00 端面密封组件
40.19 用于“加强型冷却”的堵头，冷接通
22.01 护套
40.20 用于全部清空的堵头
22.02 滑键
40.21 用于连接压力测量仪的堵头
22.03 O 形环
40.22 用于轴密封（带有自冲洗）的堵头（两侧
22.04 内六角圆柱头螺钉
）（从机器内部空间接收冲洗/封闭液体
22.07 用于安装的密封剂 ）或冲洗接口 (Lobe purge)。
22.08 用于安装的密封剂（带润滑膏） 40.23 用于安装的密封剂
30.01 D 侧控制盘 40.24 PTFE 密封带
30.02 N 侧控制盘 48.01 1)
用于局部清空的盲法兰
30.03 内六角圆柱头螺钉 48.02 1)
预焊接法兰
30.04 夹紧销 48.03 1)
六角螺栓
30.05 夹紧销 48.04 1)
六角螺母
30.06 用于安装的密封剂 48.05 1)
密封垫
30.09 内六角圆柱头螺钉 50.01 轴承箱，D 侧
30.10 减压堵头 50.02 轴承箱，N 侧
2)
30.11 O 形环 50.03 轴承盖，D 侧，内部
30.13 *) 螺旋塞 50.04 轴承盖，N 侧，内部
)
30.14 * 螺旋塞 50.05 轴承盖，D 侧，外部
*)
35.01 外罩（无/有隔板） 50.06 轴承盖，N 侧，外部
35.02 拉伸杆 50.07 挡圈
35.03 六角螺母 50.08 滚子轴承
35.04 垫片 50.09 滚子轴承
35.05 用于安装的密封剂 50.10 径向轴密装圈，内部
2)
35.06 O 形环 50.11 径向轴密装圈，外部

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 36

 部件编号 名称
Pos: 87 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

50.12 六角螺栓
50.13 六角螺栓
50.14 内六角圆柱头螺钉
50.15 螺纹销钉
50.16 圆头注油嘴
50.17 平衡环
50.25 用于安装的密封剂
50.28 堵头
50.29 V 形环

表11 元件名称依据零件号
1)
针对带有部分清空接口的型号
2)
针对带 O 形环的密封件
3)
针对用作真空泵的型号
*)
根据型号
**)
根据气体出入口的位置
Pos: 88 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Explosionszeichnungen @ 8\mod_1344585239591_54858.doc @ 66380 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 37

9.1.2 分解图

图 11 真空泵 2BE3/4 分解图（提供的配置可能在细节上存在偏差）

Pos: 89 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Abmessungen @ 8\mod_1344493843447_54858.doc @ 65930 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 38

9.1.3 尺寸

机器的主要连接尺寸可以从单独的尺寸图中获取
( 第 1.2 章，第 6 页)。

D N N4.21 D
1

øD
H
A B C

图 12 主要尺寸

1 用于局部清空的预焊接法兰 (N4.21)；额定宽度 DN 50 [2“]

局部清空的接线类型 ( 第 9.1.7 章，第 43 页)

类型 A B C E H ∅ D
2BE3/4
[mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.] [mm] [in.
]
30. 490 19.3 892 35.1 541 21.3 1041 41.0 429.5 16.9 60.3 2 ⅜
32. 490 19.3 1128 44.4 541 21.3 1041 41.0 429.5 16.9 60.3 2 ⅜
40. 594 23.4 1169 46.0 689 27.1 1349 53.1 560 22.0 60.3 2 ⅜
42. 594 23.4 1458 57.4 689 27.1 1349 53.1 560 22.0 60.3 2 ⅜
50. 672 26.5 1568 61.7 819 32.2 1609 63.3 698 27.5 60.3 2 ⅜
52. 672 26.5 1818 71.6 819 32.2 1609 63.3 698 27.5 60.3 2 ⅜
60. 650 25.6 1843 72.6 944 37.2 1859 73.2 809 31.9 60.3 2 ⅜
62. 650 25.6 2138 84.2 944 37.2 1859 73.2 809 31.9 60.3 2 ⅜
67. 733 28.9 2280 89.8 1004 39.5 1984 78.1 877 34.5 60.3 2 ⅜
72. 722 28.4 2500 98.4 1094 43.1 2164 85.2 952 37.5 60.3 2 ⅜

表12 主要尺寸
Pos: 90 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1
Pos: 91 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Schnittbild Montage-Hilfsscheibe @ 8\mod_1344414117287_54858.doc @ 65368 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 39

9.1.4 安装辅助垫圈截面图 9.1.6 轴瓦截面图
50.08
50.01 50.17 50.15

50.12
10 mm
50.14 / 50.18 [0.394"]
50.07

图 13 安装辅助垫圈
Pos: 92 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schnittbild Stopfbuchse @ 8\mod_1344590765294_54858.doc @ 66440 @ 3 @ 1

9.1.5 填料盒截面图
50.10
50.09
15.03 15.02 15.03 15.06 / 15.07
50.05 50.29
15.01 50.11 50.03

50.28 50.13 40.01

图 15 驱动侧轴瓦 2BE3

40.01 侧面铭牌
50.01 轴承箱，D 侧
50.03 轴承盖，D 侧，内部
50.05 轴承盖，D 侧，外部
50.07 挡圈
50.08 圆锥滚子轴承
50.09 轴向轴密封圈，内部
50.10 轴向轴密封圈，外部
50.11 六角螺栓
15.04
50.12 内六角圆柱头螺钉
50.13 六角螺栓
15.05
22.01 40.01 (1) 50.14 螺纹销钉
50.15 圆头注油嘴
图 14 填料盒 50.17 润滑脂
50.18 液体螺纹固定剂，可正常溶解
15.01 填料压盖 50.28 堵头
15.02 套环 50.29 毡垫圈
15.03 填料套
15.04 用于设置的六角螺栓
15.05 垫片
15.06 用于轴密封的堵头（带外部冲洗）
15.07 PTFE 密封带
22.01 护套
40.01 侧面铭牌
(1) 拉紧螺纹，位于大气侧的套环中
Pos: 93 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schnittbilder Lagereinsätze @ 8\mod_1344591007780_54858.doc @ 66459 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 40

 50.08
40.01 50.15 50.17 50.02

50.12
10 mm
[0.394"] 50.14 / 50.18

50.07

1 WE
50.06

2 WE

50.10
50.09

50.29
50.06
50.04
50.28

图 16 驱动侧轴瓦 2BE4
50.16 50.13 50.11
40.01 侧面铭牌
50.01 轴承箱，D 侧
图 17 非驱动侧轴瓦 2BE3
50.03 轴承盖，D 侧，内部
50.05 轴承盖，D 侧，外部 40.01 侧面铭牌
50.07 挡圈 50.02 轴承箱，N 侧
50.08 圆柱滚子轴承，NU 50.04 轴承盖，N 侧，内部
50.10 轴向轴密封圈，内部 50.06 轴承盖，N 侧，外部
50.11 轴向轴密封圈，外部 50.07 挡圈
50.12 六角螺栓，轴承盖 50.08 圆锥滚子轴承
50.13 六角螺栓，轴承箱 50.09 轴向轴密封圈，内部
50.14 圆柱头螺钉，轴承箱 50.10 轴向轴密封圈，外部
50.15 螺纹销钉 50.11 六角螺栓
50.16 圆头注油嘴 50.12 内六角圆柱头螺钉
50.18 润滑脂 50.13 六角螺栓
50.19 液体螺纹固定剂，可正常溶解 50.14 螺纹销钉
50.24 密封剂，轴承盖 50.15 圆头注油嘴
50.28 堵头 50.16 平衡环
50.29 挡油环 50.17 润滑脂
50.30 Molykotepaste 50.18 液体螺纹固定剂，可正常溶解
50.31 防腐剂，轴密封环 50.28 堵头
50.29 毡垫圈
1WE 带一个轴末端的型号（在 N
侧没有轴末端）
2WE 带两个轴末端的型号（第二个轴末端在
N 侧）

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 41

 50.12 六角螺栓，轴承盖
50.13 六角螺栓，轴承箱
50.14 圆柱头螺钉，轴承箱
50.15 螺纹销钉
50.16 圆头注油嘴
50.17 平衡环
50.18 润滑脂
50.19 液体螺纹固定剂，可正常溶解
50.20 轴保护罩
50.21 六角螺栓，轴保护罩
50.24 密封剂，轴承盖
50.28 堵头
50.29 挡油环
50.30 Molykotepaste
50.31 防腐剂，轴密封环
1WE 带一个轴末端的型号（在 N
侧没有轴末端）
2WE 带两个轴末端的型号（第二个轴末端在
N 侧）

用于导出旧油脂的钻孔连接螺纹（零件号 50.28）
图 18 非驱动侧轴瓦 2BE4

40.01 侧面铭牌 类型 2BE3/4... 管螺纹符合 ISO 7/1

50.02 轴承箱，N 侧 30....42. Rp ¼
50.04 轴承盖，N 侧，内部 50....72. Rp ½
50.06 轴承盖，N 侧，外部
50.07 挡圈 表13 用于导出旧油脂的连接螺纹
50.09 圆柱滚子轴承，NUP
Pos: 94 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

50.10 轴向轴密封圈，内部
50.11 轴向轴密封圈，外部
Pos: 95 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/UEB_Schaltbeispiele @ 8\mod_1344414291929_54858.doc @ 65387 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 42

9.1.7 开关示例
Pos: 96 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schaltbeispiele Pumpe @ 8\mod_1344585809491_54858.doc @ 66400 @ @ 1

泵开关示例

下面的管道图展示了安装泵时的重要元件。
C30 C16 C13 C12 C11 C10
PI

B30

D30

A28
E13 PI FI E14 E11 E10
A41

A21
D13 D14 D11 D10
A20 PI FI

A27
D51
D56
E30 D50

图 19 泵开关示例（已安装液体分离器）

C16 C13 PI C12 C11 C10

A28
A20 E13 PI FI E14 E11 E10

C30

D13 D14 D11 D10

PI FI

A27
D51
D56
E30 D50

图 20 泵开关示例（无液体分离器）

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 43

 C30 C16 C13 C12 C11 C10
PI

B30

D31
B40 D30

A28
E13 PI FI
E14 E11 E10
A20

E30 A27
D51
D56
D10 D50 D10
D21

TC D26
D20

D22

图 21 泵开关示例（已安装液体分离器和自调节的工作液体回路）

A20

A21

A41

图 22 泵开关示例（带有侧分离器）

B30 B30

D30 D30
B40

A20 A41 A20

A41

A21 A21

图 23 共用一个液体容器的多个泵的开关示例

B30 B30
D30

B40

A20 A20

A21 A21

D40
A41 A41
A46 A46

图 24 多个泵（液体容器的容量有所提升）的开关示例

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 44

图例
A20 真空泵 C13 压力测量仪 D30 用于已分离工作液体的导
管
A21 用于局部清空的管道 C16 叉形管 D31 冷却塔或热交换器
A27 用于全部清空的堵头 C30 压力管道（气体） D40 用于多余液体的导管
A28 用于连接压力测量仪的堵 D10 用于工作液体的输送管道 D50 用于清空和冲洗的管道
头
A41 闭锁阀组（用于确保 D11 闭锁阀组 D51 闭锁阀组
局部清空）
A46 漏斗或观察窗口 D13 压力测量仪 D56 漏斗或观察窗口
B30 已安装液体分离器 D14 流量测量仪 E10 用于冲洗液体/封闭液体的
输送管道（外部冲洗）
B40 工作液体储存容器 D20 用于附加工作液体的输送管 E11 闭锁阀组
道
C10 吸气管道 D21 闭锁阀组 E13 压力测量仪
C11 闭锁阀组 D22 用于旁路的阀门 E14 流量测量仪
C12 止回阀组 D26 温度调节器 E30 用于轴密封件泄漏液体的
导管
Pos: 97 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 45

Pos: 98 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schaltbeispiele Kompressor @ 8\mod_1344589318058_54858.doc @ 66420 @ @ 1

压缩机开关示例

下面的管道图展示了安装压缩机时的重要元件。
PI

PI

PI FI

PI FI

图 25 压缩机开关示例（装有上压力接口）

PI

PI

PI FI

PI FI

图 26 压缩机开关示例（装有下压力接口）

PI

PI

PI FI

TC

图 27 压缩机开关示例（含自调节的工作液体回路）

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 46

图例
A10 压缩机 C20 旁通管 D26 温度调节器
A17 用于全部清空的堵头 C21 滑阀 D27 热交换器
A18 用于连接压力测量仪的堵 C30 压力管道（气体） D30 用于已分离工作液体的导管
头
A21 用于局部清空的管道 C31 滑阀 D31 阀门
B10 液体分离器 C32 止回阀 D50 用于清空和冲洗的管道
B11 液位指示器 C40 压力管道（气体和液体） D51 阀门
B13 压力测量仪 D10 用于工作液体的输送管道 D56 漏斗或观察窗口
B17 安全阀 D11 阀门 E10 用于封闭液体的输送管道（外
部冲洗）
C10 吸气管道 D13 压力测量仪 E11 阀门
C11 滑阀 D14 流量测量仪 E13 压力测量仪
C12 止回阀 D20 用于已分离工作液体的回路管 E14 流量测量仪
道
C13 压力测量仪 D21 闭锁阀组 E30 用于轴密封件泄漏液体的导管
Pos: 99 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1
Pos: 100 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 47

Pos: 101 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/UEB_Technische Daten @ 8\mod_1344415032523_54858.doc @ 65444 @ 2 @ 1
9.2.3 振动

9.2 技术数据 类型 2BE3/4... 允许的标准振动速度（固定放置）

Pos: 102 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Umgebungsbedingungen @ 8\mod_1344415065213_54858.doc @ 65463 @ 3 @ 1
，单位 mm/s，RMS
9.2.1 环境条件 30/32 ≤ 4.5
40/42 ≤ 4.5
如果在其它环境条件下使用应与制造商进行协商
。 50/52 ≤ 4.5
60/62 ≤ 4.5
67. ≤ 4.5
温度 相对空气湿度[%] 72. ≤ 4.5
长期 短期
表16 允许的振动速度
–20 °C 至 ≤ 85 ≤ 100
+40 °C
在特殊情况下可商定并批准更高的振动值。
[≤ 104 °F]

表14 环境条件
Pos: 103 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schalldruckpegel @ 8\mod_1344438212358_54858.doc @ 65870 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.2 声平
Pos: 105 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Anzugsdrehmomente @ 8\mod_1344415825490_54858.doc @ 65520 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.4 拧紧力矩
类型 测量区域声压和声平
螺栓的强度等级 A4-70 (≤M20) 或 8.8 及更高
LpA [dB(A)] LWA [dB(A)]
2BE3/4 30./32. 75-82 89-98 螺纹尺寸 拧紧力矩

2BE3/4 40./42. 77-86 92-101 [Nm] [ft lbs]

2BE3/4 50./52. 72-82 89-99 M8 20 15

2BE3/4 60./62. 76-91 93-107 M10 40 30

2BE3/4 67./72. 73-91 93-112 M12 70 52

M16 170 125
表15 声平
M20 340 250
M24 600 443
A
评估的声平信息(中等测量区域声压及声平)仅表 表17 拧紧力矩 螺栓的强度等级 A4-70 (≤
明通过真空泵和压缩机所获得的噪音。 M20) 或 8.8 及更高
根据 EN IS 2251 和
螺栓的强度等级 4.8 至 6.8
EN ISO 3746，仅适用于标准的检测环境，公差
+3 dB。 螺纹尺寸 拧紧力矩
由于以下原因，安装地点产生的声平可能会出现 [Nm] [ft lbs]
明显偏差：
M8 11 8
 供货范围以外的外部噪音（例如相连管道和
元件中的流动噪音） M10 22 16

 空间上的声音反作用（例如声音反射，共鸣 M12 38 28
）。 M16 92 68

Pos: 104 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Schwingung @ 8\mod_1344437748202_54858.doc @ 65850 @ 3 @ 1
M20 180 133
M24 310 230
M36 1080 797
M42 1700 1254

表18 拧紧力矩 螺栓强度等级 4.8 至 6.8

Pos: 106 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Gewichtsangaben @ 8\mod_1344440442764_54858.doc @ 65910 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 48

9.2.5 重量信息

类型 重量 [t] 重量 [sh tn]

Pos: 107 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

2BE3/4.
.. 无配件 带分离器和 无配件 带分离器和
叉形管 叉形管
30. 1.5 1.8 1.7 2.0
32. 1.9 2.3 2.1 2.5
40. 2.9 3.4 3.2 3.8
42. 3.3 3.9 3.6 4.3
50. 5.4 6.2 6.0 6.8
52. 6.0 6.8 6.6 7.5
60. 8.2 9.2 9.0 10.1
62. 9.1 10.2 10.0 11.2
67. 11.4 12.7 12.6 14.0
72. 14.2 15.7 15.7 17.3

表19 重量信息
Pos: 108 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Packungsgröße Stopfbuchsen @ 8\mod_1344498664854_54858.doc @ 65989 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.6 填料套尺寸

填料套数据 2BE3/4...

30./ 32. 40./ 42. 50./ 52. 60./ 62. 67. 72.

护套额定直径 [mm] 155 205 245 270 290 305

[in.] 6.102 8.07 9.646 10.63 11.417 12.008
每台机器的密装圈总长 [m] 4.6 5.9 7.1 7.7 8.3 8.7
[ft] 15.09 19.36 23.29 25.26 27.23 28.54
单个密装圈的长度 [mm} 560 710 850 940 1000 1040
[in.] 22.05 27.95 33.46 37.00 39.37 40.94
密装圈截面 [mm x mm] 12 x 12 14 x 14 16 x 16 16 x 16 16 x 16 18 x 18
[in. x 0.47 x 0.55 x 0 0.63 x 0.63 x 0.63 x 0.71 x
in.] 0.47 .55 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.71
每个填料盒的内部密装圈数量 2
每个填料盒的外部密装圈数量 2
质量 透明的苎麻纤维包装，使用 PTFE 防水层或棉质包装（
备件清单）

表20 填料套技术数据
Pos: 109 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1
Pos: 110 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Wellendichtungen @ 8\mod_1344501869811_54858.doc @ 66068 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 49

9.2.7 轴密封
9.2.9 工作液体
类型 轴密封
尺寸 数值
2BE3/4 ...- ...3 带外部冲洗的填料盒
特征 不可燃、爆炸性、腐蚀性
2BE3/4 ...- ...4 带自冲洗的填料盒 或毒性（例如水）
2BE3/4 ...- ...5 端面密封，不同配置 无固体材料
2BE3/4 ...- ...6 （ 第 1.2 章，第 6 页） 协商所使用的材料和介质
2BE3/4 ...- ...7 温度 额定值 15°C
2BE3/4 ...- ...8 [59 °F]
2BE3/4 ...- ...9 极限值 0°C...65°C
[32 °F...140 °F]
表21 轴密封
Pos: 111 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Fördermedien @ 8\mod_1344605753926_54858.doc @ 66480 @ 3 @ 1
沸点 超出工作温度至少10 K
9.2.8 输送介质 颗粒尺寸 < 10 μm

压缩机运行 固体数量 < 200 ppm

粘度 < 25 cSt
尺寸 数值
输送介质类型 气体依据规划资料或目录 表24 对工作液体的要求
Pos: 113 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

允许的绝对吸气压力 900...2000 mbar

[13...29 psia]
允许的绝对压缩压力 取决于转速和类型
允许的温度范围 0 °C...80 °C
[32 °F...176 °F]

表22 压缩机输送介质

泵运行

尺寸 数值
输送介质类型 气体依据规划资料或目录
允许的绝对吸气压力 min. 160 mbar
[min 2.3 psia]
允许的绝对压缩压力 max. 1100 mbar
[max. 16 psia]
允许的温度范围 0 °C...80 °C
[32 °F...176 °F]

表23 真空泵输送介质
Pos: 114 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 50

Pos: 115 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Betriebsflüssigkeitsvolumenströme Kompressorbetrieb @ 8\mod_1344502353359_54858.doc @ 66088 @ @ 1

压缩机运行时的标准工作液体流量

类型 2BE3/4... 允许的转速范围 工作液体流量 [m³/h]，取决于压缩机压力 [bar 绝对值]（公差约

± 10%），吸气压力
nB 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6
min-1 bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar
30. 566...809 5.4 7.8 9.0 11.4 14.0 16.2 18.6 –
32. 566...809 5.8 8.0 10.6 13.0 15.6 18.0 20.4 –
40. 428...612 5.8 10.0 13.3 17.1 20.8 24.6 28.3 32.1
42. 428...612 5.8 11.7 16.7 22.5 27.5 32.9 – –
50. 334...477 5.8 12.5 19.2 25.8 32.5 38.8 45.4 52.1
52. 334...477 5.8 14.2 22.5 30.4 38.5 46.3 – –
60. 283...405 5.8 15.0 25.0 34.0 44.0 53.0 – –
62. 283...405 5.8 17.5 29.0 40.0 52.0 – – –
67. 261...373 5.8 20.0 33.0 48.0 61.0 74.0 – –
72. 238...341 5.8 22.0 39.0 56.0 72.0 89.0 – –

表25 压缩机运行时的工作液体流量（ISO 单位）

– 无法运行/不允许运行

类型 2BE3/4... 允许的转速范围 工作液体流量 [US gpm]，取决于压缩机压力 [psig]（公差约

± 10%），吸气压力
nB 2.7 5.6 8.5 11.4 14.3 17.2 20.1 23.0
rpm psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig
30. 566...809 24 31 40 50 62 71 82 –
32. 566...809 26 35 47 57 69 79 90 –
40. 428...612 26 44 59 75 92 108 125 141
42. 428...612 26 52 74 99 121 145 – –
50. 334...477 26 55 85 114 143 171 200 229
52. 334...477 26 63 99 134 170 204 – –
60. 283...405 26 66 110 150 194 233 277 319
62. 283...405 26 77 128 126 229 273 – –
67. 261...373 26 88 145 211 269 326 – –
72. 238...341 26 97 172 247 317 392 – –

表26 压缩机运行时的工作液体流量（美式单位）

– 无法运行/不允许运行
Pos: 116 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 51

Pos: 117 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Betriebsflüssigkeitsvolumenströme Vakuumbetrieb @ 8\mod_1344503848888_54858.doc @ 66108 @ @ 1

真空运行时的标准工作液体流量

在工作液体流量较高时（冷接通）应将表格中给
出的数值加倍。

类型 2BE3/4... 允许的转速范围 工作液体流量 [m³/h]，取决于吸气压力 [mbar 绝对值]（公差约

± 10%），压缩机压力
nB 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800
min-1 mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar mbar
30. 453...809 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.1 4.4 3.7 3.0 2.4
32. 453...809 6.7 7.0 7.1 6.5 5.6 4.7 3.8 3.0
40. 343...612 9.4 9.7 9.9 9.0 7.9 6.6 5.3 4.2
42. 343...612 12.8 13.2 13.5 12.3 10.7 9.0 7.3 5.8
50. 229...477 17.4 17.7 18.3 16.6 14.4 12.1 9.9 7.8
52. 229...477 21.1 21.6 22.2 20.2 17.6 14.8 12.0 9.5
60. 194...405 24.1 24.7 25.4 23.0 20.1 16.9 13.7 10.9
62. 194...405 29.4 30.1 30.9 28.0 24.4 20.5 16.7 13.2
67. 179...373 34.6 35.5 36.4 33.0 28.7 24.1 19.7 15.5
72. 164...341 41.3 42.2 43.5 39.4 34.3 28.9 23.5 18.6

表27 真空运行时的工作液体流量（ISO 单位）

– 无法运行/不允许运行

类型 2BE3/4... 允许的转速范围 工作液体流量 [US gpm]，取决于吸气压力 [HgV]（公差约

± 10%），压缩机压力
nB 24 22.5 21 18.1 15.1 12.2 9.21 6.3
rpm HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV HgV
30. 453...809 23 24 25 23 19 16 13 11
32. 453...809 30 31 31 29 25 21 17 13
40. 343...612 41 43 44 40 35 29 23 19
42. 343...612 56 58 60 54 47 40 32 26
50. 229...477 77 78 81 73 63 53 44 34
52. 229...477 93 95 98 89 78 65 53 42
60. 194...405 106 109 112 101 89 75 60 48
62. 194...405 130 133 136 123 108 90 74 58
67. 179...373 152 156 160 145 126 106 87 68
72. 164...341 182 186 192 174 151 127 104 82

表28 真空运行时的工作液体流量（美式单位）

– 无法运行/不允许运行
Pos: 118 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 52

Pos: 119 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Sperrflüssigkeit der Wellendichtung @ 8\mod_1352271925233_54858.doc @ 69580 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.10 进行轴密封的封闭液体（带外部供应装置）

尺寸 数值
类型 
温度 额定值 +15 °C [59 °F]
极限值 最低 0 °C [32 °F]
最高 65 °C [149 °F]
密封空间中封闭液体的蒸汽压力，最高温度 65°C 或最小间距
10 K。应使用较低的数值。必要时与密封件制造商协商。
供给压力 在填料盒中： 超出压缩压力 0.1...0.3 bar
[1.45...4.35 psi]。仅设置为滴状泄漏。
在单面作用的端面密封 超过工作液体供给压力（在工作液体的供给支路中）或压缩压力
中： （在单独供给时）约 0.1...0.3 bar [约 1.45...4.35 psi]
在双面作用的端面密封 依据制造商说明
中：
流量 在填料盒中： 0.5 dm³/min [0.132 gal (US)/min (0.017 ft³/min)]
（在 D 侧和 N 在极大程度上取决于填料盒的设置。仅设置为滴状泄漏。
侧供给！） 在端面密封中 依据制造商说明

表29 进行轴密封的封闭液体（带外部供应装置）

Pos: 120 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier ZWEIspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002149663_0.doc @ 63889 @ @ 1

Pos: 121 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/KP2K Schmiermittel @ 8\mod_1344500469063_54858.doc @ 66028 @ 3 @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 53

9.2.11 润滑剂 再润滑期限适用于负荷正常、运行振动低、环境
空气接近中性的情况，并且应当使用选择表中所
根据 DIN 51825，KP2K 给出的高品质圆柱滚子轴承润滑脂。
润滑脂应与增稠剂锂基皂和矿物油底油一起使用 在条件不理想（例如环境空气湿度较高）时，应
。 相应缩短再润滑期限。

 每 2,000
制造商 油脂名称 运行小时需进行再润滑，至少半年一次。
SHELL Alvania EP (LF) 2  每 20,000 运行小时需更换润滑脂，最迟为运行
[已在工厂用于首次润滑] 3 年后。
Pos: 123 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Entkalkungslösungen @ 8\mod_1344419448135_54858.doc @ 65711 @ 3 @ 1

AGIP GR MU EP2 9.2.12 除钙方案

CHEVRON Dura-Lith Grease EP2
除钙方案 注释
TEXACO Novatex Grease EP2
15-17 重量配比 80% 在机器停止时清洁
DEA Paragon EP2
磷酸对应 100% 的水
ESSO Beacon EP2
2 重量配比 80% 磷酸对应 在机器停止时清洁
MOBIL Mobilux EP2 100% 的水
5% 的甲酸
表30 可用的滚子轴承润滑脂
Pos: 122 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Fettschmiermengen @ 8\mod_1344500251019_54858.doc @ 66008 @ @ 1

表32 除钙方案
类型 每个润滑点的油脂量 Pos: 124 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Konservierungsmittel @ 8\mod_1344501441957_54858.doc @ 66048 @ 3 @ 1

[g] [oz] 9.2.13 防腐剂

2BE3 30./ 32. 90 3.2
防腐剂建议使用AVILUB VCI 1414。
2BE3 40./ 42. 100 3.5
AVILUB VCI 1414
2BE3 50./ 52. 140 5
是一种有机防腐剂水基混合物，能够形成保护膜
2BE3 60./ 62. 160 5.7 。可生物降解，蒸汽健康无害。AVILUB VCI
2BE3 67./ 72. 240 8.5 1414 不含亚硝酸盐、铬酸盐和硅树脂。

2BE4 30./ 32. 40 1.5 Pos: 125 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Formatwechsel - ab hier EINspaltig @ 8\mod_1344002103554_0.doc @ 63870 @ @ 1

2BE4 40./ 42. 40 1.5

2BE4 50./ 52. 60 2.2
2BE4 60./ 62. 60 2.2
2BE4 67./ 72. 90 3.2

表31 滚子轴承中的最低润滑油脂量

再润滑期限
Pos: 126 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 54

Pos: 127 /626-Gardner Denver/Produktspezifische Module/09 Anhang/2BE3/2BE4 30. bis 72./2BE3/4 30.-72. Stutzenbelastung an den Flanschen @ 8\mod_1344438787906_54858.doc @ 65890 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.14 管接头负荷符合 ISO 5199

2BE3/4 法兰 1 法兰 2 法兰 3 法兰 4
DN F MB MT DN F MB MT DN F MB MT DN F MB MT
[N] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [Nm] [Nm] [N] [Nm] [Nm]
30/32 150 2400 1000 1350 150 1900 820 1100 200 4200 2400 3200 200 3500 1900 2500
40/42 250 4400 3000 4100 250 3600 2500 3350 300 5700 5000 6600 300 5700 5000 6600
50/52 300 4400 3500 4700 300 5200 4200 5600 350 5700 5200 6900 350 5700 5200 6900
60/62 350 7000 6700 9000 350 6100 5700 7600 400 7500 7900 10000 400 7500 7900 10000
67. 350 7000 6700 9000 350 6100 5700 7600 500 9100 11500 15000 500 9100 11500 15000
72. 400 7000 7300 9750 400 6100 6200 8200 500 9100 11500 15000 500 9100 11500 15000

表33 法兰上允许的力和扭矩（ISO 单位）

2BE3/4 法兰 1 法兰 2 法兰 3 法兰 4
DN F MB MT DN F MB MT DN F MB MT [ft DN F MB MT [ft
[lbf] [ft [ft [lbf] [ft [ft [lbf] [ft lbs] [lbf] [ft lbs]
lbs] lbs] lbs] lbs] lbs] lbs]
30/32 6 540 735 995 6 425 605 810 8 945 1770 2360 8 785 1900 1845
40/42 10 990 2210 3025 10 810 1845 2470 12 1280 3690 4865 12 1280 3690 4865
50/52 12 990 2580 3465 12 1170 3100 4130 14 1280 3835 5090 14 1280 3835 5090
60/62 14 1575 4940 6635 14 1370 4200 5600 16 1685 5825 7375 16 1685 5825 7375
67. 14 1575 4940 6635 14 1370 4200 5600 20 2045 8480 11100 20 2045 8480 11100
72. 16 1575 5385 7190 16 1370 4570 6050 20 2045 8480 11100 20 2045 8480 11100

表34 法兰上允许的力和力矩（美式单位）

图 28 法兰上所使用的力和力矩的概览
Pos: 128 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 55

 Pos: 129 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Unbedenklichkeitsbescheinigung @ 8\mod_1344419935225_54858.doc @ 65768 @ 2 @ 1

9.3 安全证明

在将机组/机器发回进行修理和/或维护时应随附此声明，并且应当正确填写并签字。
只有在提供完整填写的本声明时，工厂才会对发回的机组/机器进行修理和/或维护工作。每台机组/机器都应提供一份单独的声明。
声明应附在外包装上。此外，应提前通过例如传真等方式将样本发送给执行相关工作的车间。
本声明只允许由获得授权的运营商专业人员填写。
运营商信息：
公司/部门/研究所：
街道：
邮编，城市：
联系人：
职位：
电话：
传真：

机组/机器信息：
产品名称：
类型：
工厂编号 (No.N)：
发回原因：

签署人发回的上述机组/机器*)
没有接触危险品。
没有使用过含石棉的材料和/或部件，例如密封件。
在使用范围内

接触过以下需要强制标识或是有害健康的材料：
商业名称： 化学名称： 材料特性
（例如有毒、易燃、
腐蚀性、放射性）：

*)
在符合项上打叉

表35 安全证明
Pos: 130 /626-Gardner Denver/zz_Layoutmodule/Seitenumbruch @ 8\mod_1344005493260_0.doc @ 63908 @ @ 1

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 56

Pos: 131 /626-Gardner Denver/Allgemeingültige Module/09 Anhang/Rückseite @ 8\mod_1344420072490_54858.doc @ 65806 @ @ 1

客服部门地址

澳大利亚 维特利尔公园，悉尼，新南威尔士州
巴西 坎皮纳斯
中国 博山、北京、上海、成都、广州
德国 纽伦堡
荷兰 阿森德尔夫特
新加坡 新加坡城
南非 维德维尔
韩国 首尔
英国 温斯福德、柴郡
美国 伯明翰（阿拉巴马州）
克利夫兰（俄亥俄州）
休斯敦（德克萨斯州）
圣彼得（密苏里州）
温哥华

具体地址请查询以下网址：
www.GDNash.com → 销售和服务 → 联系客服

Nash – Zweigniederlassung der

Gardner Denver Deutschland GmbH
Katzwanger Straße 150
90461 Nürnberg
德国（Germany)

版本 01/2016 电话： +49 (0) 911-1454-0

印刷号 OM5004 +49 (0) 911-1454-5256（客服）
语言 ZH_CN 传真： +49 (0) 911-1454-6935
+49 (0) 911-1454-5252（客服）
E-Mail: nash.de@gardnerdenver.com
网页： www.GDNash.com

保留技术更改权利。
=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Inhalt ===

2BE3 30.–72. / 2BE4 30.–72. 01/2016 57

 6 Purchased Parts 外 购 件

6.1 Main drive motor

6.2 Pressure gauge
6.3 Pressure switch
6.4 Solenoid valve
6.5 Centrifugal pump

6.1 主驱动电机
6.2 压力表
6.3 压力开关
6.4 电磁阀
6.5 离心泵
6.1 Main drive motor 主驱动电机
*Origin 产地：China 中国
*Manufacturer 制造商： Regal Beloit Wuxi Co.,Ltd.
雷勃电气(无锡)有限公司
*Model 型号： HJN1 315M-4
 三相异步电动机使用维护技术指导书
1.警告！安装使用前的注意事项
1.1 必须确认电动机所示的参数符合你的需要。
1.2 必须确认电动机未受到任何损害。
1.3 拆除轴伸上的轴卡（如果电动机有的话），但在电动机运输前必须装上。
1.4 电动机的吊环及其他吊重装置在使用前必须拧紧，且只能用于起吊电动机本身。如果电动机有一个以上
吊环时，必须一起使用以分担重量。
1.5 确认安装后，电动机的安装方式与电动机铭牌上指示的相一致，有泄水孔的其位置适合于使用场合，并
保持泄水孔在最低位置。如果电动机在安装以后无法达到上述要求，请与雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司联系。
1.6 缓慢旋转电动机轴伸，确认电动机可以自由转动。
2.警告！请遵守如下安全预防措施
2.1 负责电动机安装、调试、操作、维护保养和检修的人员必须经过完整的技术培训，以了解其对个人和其
他人员的危险性和对设备的危害性。因为电动机如果没有正确安装、调试、操作和保养，会造成严重或者致命的
伤害。
特定的安全规范请按照国家相关规定。
2.2 电动机维护保养和检修前必须将所有与电动机及其配件连接的电源切断甚至将电源线拆掉，同时确认电
动机已经完全停转。
2.3 电动机必须可靠接地，相应的配套保护装置也必须接地，防止电动机在使用时产生危险，或导致电动机
产生失效故障。
2.4 电动机安全防护和其他保护装置不能开路或不使用，正确和完全的使用各种保护可以保证电动机的寿命。

－1－

2.5 电动机必须有适当的防护，防止工作人员接近旋转体；电动机运转时，严禁触碰转动部分。
2.6 严禁触摸电动机接线等带电部分。有自动启动、自动关闭或遥控启动的场合，在其启动方式未切断时，
必须在电动机四周设立禁示牌，警告电动机可能随时会启动。
2.7 电动机启动前，必须确认所有轴键都已经稳固装妥。
2.8 为了防止电动机过载运行，最好安装绕组温度监测装置。雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司可以在电动机绕组
装设温度保护装置，它的引接线可以直接和控制器连接，用于自动断电保护。
2.9 严禁电动机缺相运行，为了防止此类事情的发生，必须安装缺相保护装置。
2.10 安装联轴器和皮带轮时，不能使用榔头重击，以免导致电动机轴承损坏。
2.11 当接近高噪声源设备时，必须带防护耳罩，电动机的噪声数值可以咨询雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司或者
查阅相关产品标准。
2.12 注意防止水等液体进入电动机内部。
2.13 电动机使用于可变速的机械时，必须确认其没有超过电动机的最大安全速度，同时确认电动机没有超载
使用（在低速时，带自冷却风扇的电动机其散热能力降低，必需增加辅助冷却风扇），如有疑问请接洽雷勃电气
（无锡）有限公司。
2.14 确认已有适当安全防护措施，避免制动失效时产生不安全事件。
2.15 雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司有些电动机带有不停机加油装置，如果电动机在运行过程中需要加入润滑油
脂时，请确认由经过适当培训的人员进行，并且带电体和转动体部分已经有完整的防护。
3. 使用环境和工作条件
3.1 环境温度不得超过 40℃，空气相对湿度不得大于 90%。
3.2 海拔不得超过 1000 米。
注意：当出现与上述环境有偏差时，例环境温度在低于-20 或高于+45℃、空气相对湿度超过 95%、海拔超
过 1000 米以及高振动场合。请确认电动机规范的适用性。如有问题请与雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司联系。

－2－
 3.3 电源的频率与铭牌上的数值偏差不得大于 2%，电压的偏差不得大于 5%（双方有约定并经过特殊设计的
除外）。
3.4 开启式电动机（IP23、IP21）适用于干净、干燥、通风良好和没有腐蚀性气体的环境。详细的资料请参
照 GB755。
3.5 封闭式电动机（IP44、IP54、IP55）可适用于相对肮脏、有湿气或尘埃的环境。详细的资料请参照 GB755。
3.6 户外防腐型电动机适用于户外或者有腐蚀性气体的环境，以及高湿气的环境。
重要提示：所有使用场合的周围都不可以阻碍电动机正常的通风。
在电动机周围有另外的通风设备时，必需确认其没有影响电动机的有效通风，如果影响必须调
整通风设备的通风量，或者改变电动机的通风路径，保证电动机的有效通风。
4. 电动机安装和启动
4.1 安装前的检查
4.1.1 检查电动机铭牌所示数值是否与使用要求相符合，电动机的接线是否与接线图相符合。
4.1.2 电动机是否有受潮现象，用兆欧表测量电动机的绝缘电阻，当电动机的绝缘电阻低于 1 兆欧时，必须
对定子线圈进行干燥处理。干燥的温度不允许超过 120℃。
4.1.3 检查电动机有无损坏、变形、紧固件有无松动或者脱落。用手缓慢转动转子，无相擦和异常现象。
4.1.4 检查电动机的安装形式是否与要求符合，IM B3 的电动机不经过改造可能不适合 IM V5（立式轴安装），
可能需要额外的支撑固定或者需要更换不同的轴承来承受轴向推力。
4.1.5 消除电动机上的尘埃、杂物等。
4.1.6 对于电动机存放时间较长（一般超过一年），必须检查电动机的轴承润滑脂的情况。如果需要应该更换
新的轴承润滑脂。
4.2 电动机的安装
4.2.1 电动机安装的基础要有一定的刚度，如果不是和其他机械安装在一起，双方均应该用质量可靠的混凝

－3－

土做基础，安装面要平整。对于经常需要移动的电动机，应采用合适的安装结构。
4.2.2 如果电动机和拖动机械中心高有差异，需要垫高电动机时，垫片的面积必须大于电动机的底脚平面的
面积，当垫片需要用几片调整高度时，其数量不能超过三片。
注意：安装基础没有足够的刚度或者结构不合理，将使电动机运行过程中产生不正常的振动和噪声，导致轴
承损坏，严重的将产生人身或设备事故。
4.2.3 安置地点应该比较宽敞，便于进行日常操作、维护和保养。
4.2.4 电动机允许采用联轴器连接。也可以采用皮带轮和正齿轮连接，请确保电动机轴端的径向力，不致使
电动机受损，如有疑问请和雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司联系。
注意：对于 4KW 以上的 2P 电动机和 30KW 以上的 4P 电动机不宜采用平皮带传动。用皮带轮传动时，皮带
轮的长度不能超过轴伸的长度，否则会引起轴头歪曲和断裂。双轴伸电动机的风扇端轴伸只能使用联轴器连接。
4.2.5 采用皮带轮传动时，必须使电动机的轴中心线和负载轴的中心线平行，并且要求皮带中心与轴中心线
垂直。
采用联轴器传动时，必须使电动机的轴中心线和负载轴中心线重合。
特别注意：采用联轴器传动时，电动机的联轴器和负载的联轴器之间必须留有足够的间隙，防止整个系统在
运行过程中由于热膨胀而导致产生轴向力，使电动机轴承损坏最终使电动机损坏。
4.2.6 安装时请确认各安装孔均以钢质螺栓、螺帽稳固地锁定，容易产生锈蚀的场合应该采用不锈钢螺栓，
高振动场合应该加装防震垫。
4.2.7 注意有泄水孔的电动机，应避免其位置不对。在泄水孔开放的情况下，必须确保有必要的保护，防止
任何物体与电动机内部接触。
4.3 电动机接线
4.3.1 电动机及控制器、过载保护以及接地的接线，必须遵守相关配线标准和安全标准。
4.3.2 电动机接线盒内或者直接在铭牌上有接线指示图，请按照接线指示图正确接线。电动机的接线板有 6

－4－
个接线柱（U1、V1、W1、U2、V2、W2）或者 3 个接线柱（U、V、W），6 个接线柱可以按照接线指示图接成
△或 Y。如果是 3 个接线柱说明已经将其余 3 个引接线在电动机内部并头，只要将外面 3 个接线柱按照 A-U、B-V、
C-W 接好。

注意：按照上述相序接线以后，从电动机轴伸端视之，电动机转向为顺时针。
特殊订货有时电动机转向为逆时针，此时请按照订单要求。
4.3.3 热保护器的接线柱（P1、P2）直接接入电动机控制设备。
4.3.4 有加热器或者 PTO 轴承保护装置的电动机一般有辅助接线盒，请按照相应的接线指示图接线。
4.3.5 对于绕线转子（LSR 系列）电动机应该与串入电阻及电源连接，并且接入控制装置。
4.3.6 在正确接线以后，要根据电动机铭牌的电压和频率来确认供电电源是否正确，确认无误以后才能启动电
动机。
4.3.7 多速电动机的接线，请按照随机的接线图连接，其在不同转速时的转向，应该在调试的时候确认，如
有问题请联系雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司。

－5－

4.4 电动机的启动
4.4.1 电动机的空载运行。
4.4.1.1 检查控制设备中的熔断器的额定电流是否符合要求，安装是否可靠。
4.4.1.2 检查启动装置的接线是否正确，启动装置是否灵活，触头接触是否良好，启动装置是否可靠接地。
4.4.1.3 电动机允许全压启动和降压启动。
注意：电动机全压启动时有 5~8 倍的启动电流，降压启动时启动转矩和电压的平方成正比。当电网容量不足
时可以采用降压启动，但是电动机必须是在空载或者轻载情况下启动。而当静止负载较大时只能采用全压启动。
4.4.1.4 确认电动机转向，如果发现电动机的转向不符合要求，只要任意对调二相接线，电动机转向就可以纠
正。
4.4.1.5 经过上述检查以后，电动机可以空载试运转，一般在电动机脱开负载的情况下运转。空载试运转需要
1~2 个小时，期间观察有无异常现象、不正常的噪音和振动、轴承是否过热或者漏油，发现上述问题必须在负载
运行以前及时进行处理。
4.4.2 电动机的负载运行
在空载运行正常以后可以进行电动机的负载运行。
4.4.2.1 在负载的情况下启动电动机，必须注意电动机如果没有很快启动或者平滑运行，应该立即切断电源，
并检查是否安装不良或接线不对。
4.4.2.2 如果有异常振动，可能是联轴器中心未对准、固定螺栓松动、基础刚性差或者是由于其他机械传递过
来的振动等。异常振动会造成电动机的损坏。
4.4.2.3 如果有异常噪音，可能是电压太低、负载被堵住、转子所拖动的负载太大、电气连接没有完全接好或
者以上问题的综合。异常噪音同样会造成电动机的损坏。
4.4.2.4 请确认运转时的电流与铭牌上的额定电流相符，并且三相电流基本平衡。绕线转子（LSR 系列）电
动机也应确认运转时的电流与铭牌上的额定电流相符，并且三相电流基本平衡。

－6－
 4.4.2.5 按照电动机的技术要求，应该限制电动机的启动次数，冷态启动不超过 3~5 次，电动机长期运行或者
在热状态时，停机后再启动应该间隔一段时间，并且不得连续启动二次，否则容易损坏电动机。
4.4.2.6 几台电动机同时使用一台变压器而变压器的容量不够大时，不能同时启动所有的电动机，应由大到小
逐台启动。
5. 检查与维护
为了保证电动机连续安全可靠的使用，必须进行及时的检查和维护，查出隐患防止故障扩大。
请按以下原则进行检查和维护工作。
5.1 电动机在运行时的常规检查。
特别注意：任何噪声和振动的突然增大或者过大，都要立即停机并迅速检查。
在连续运行期间应该定期检查轴承温度，至少每天一次。
5.1.1 电动机应该经常保持清洁，防止油、水等污物进入电动机内部。
5.1.2 电动机应保持良好的通风，进出风口必须保持畅通无阻，风罩的网眼应该经常清理，防止阻塞。
5.1.3 在电动机运行过程中，应该经常监控，如有异常，要立即关机检查，待故障排除以后方可继续运行。
5.2 电动机的停机检查
当发生下列情况必须立即停机检查：
5.2.1 电动机剧烈振动；
5.2.2 电动机拖动设备损坏；
5.2.3 电动机轴承发热严重；
5.2.4 电动机发生窜轴冲击；
5.2.5 电动机发生转速突然下降；
5.2.6 电动机发生扫膛，或者外壳温度迅速上升；
5.2.7 电动机或者起动装置冒烟起火；

－7－

5.2.8 发生人员意外事故。
5.3 电动机的定期检查
根据电动机的使用条件，应该定期对电动机进行检查。
5.3.1 检查电动机的固定螺栓有无松动或者锈蚀等影响固定性能。
5.3.2 检查电气连接是否牢固，有无锈蚀等现象影响接触性能。
5.3.3 检查绕线转子（LSR 系列）电动机滑环的电气连接是否牢固，滑环和电刷是否磨损。
5.3.4 检查电动机接地是否牢固，有无锈蚀等现象影响接地性能。
5.3.5 检查电动机的轴封是否老化，如果老化或者已经磨损，应该更换，如果不了解具体规格可以联系雷勃
电气（无锡）有限公司。
5.3.6 检查联轴器固定牢固并且对心正确。
5.3.7 检查电动机内部是否有有损性能的液体存在，如果有应该将其排除。
5.3.8 检查电动机的轴承，如果已经磨损应该立即更换。
5.3.9 检查电动机的涂漆，如果需要应该重新油漆，防止过度锈蚀。
5.4 电动机的维护
电动机应该周期性的进行保养，发现故障以后及时处理。一般情况每月进行一次小的保养，一年进行一次全
面的保养。
5.4.1 小保养的项目有：
5.4.1.1 清除电动机表面尘埃；
5.4.1.2 测量电动机的绝缘电阻；
5.4.1.3 紧固固定螺栓和接地螺栓，以及各类连接螺栓；
5.4.1.4 清理起动装置和绝缘端子；
5.4.1.5 清理绕线转子（LSR 系列）电动机滑环和电刷部分的尘埃、结碳等；

－8－
 5.4.1.6 清理电动机风罩网孔，确保进风和出风口畅通无阻。
5.4.2 全面保养的项目有：
5.4.2.1 小保养的全部项目；
5.4.2.2 电动机内部的清理，使电动机定子绕组达到整洁、无油污和不露铜；
5.4.2.3 电动机轴承是否完好，如果已经损坏立即更换。在正常使用环境下建议每年更换一次轴承（每年运行
时间在 8000 小时左右）；
5.4.2.4 如果轴承不需要更换，那么应该对轴承进行清洗，并且更换润滑脂；
5.4.2.5 电动机其他部件的清理或更换。
6. 电动机的润滑
电动机的正确润滑将直接影响轴承的寿命，也将影响到电动机的使用寿命。正确和定期给电动机轴承加润滑
脂（油）就非常重要。
6.1 对于小型电动机我公司已经全面采用双密封轴承（轴承型号后面为“ZZ” ），这种轴承为预注油式，不需
要再注油。
6.2 较大电动机（一般在 H280 及以上）及特定要求电动机，带有注排油装置，这些电动机在出厂时已经注
油，但是需要定期更换油脂。更换油脂的周期根据电动机的大小和使用情况而定。
下面是电动机加油建议值（过度或者频繁的加油也可能使电动机受损）

额定功率 电机转速 加油周期建议值

（KW） （转/分） 正常工况 严酷工况 恶劣工况
＜18.5 1500 5年 3年 1年
18.5~90 1500 1年 6 个月 3 个月

－9－

90~200 1500 3 个月 3 个月 1 个月
200~630 1500 3 个月 1 个月 15 天
＜18.5 3000 5年 3年 1年
18.5~90 3000 1年 6 个月 3 个月
90~200 3000 3 个月 1 个月 1 个月
200~630 3000 3 个月 1 个月 15 天

注：
正常工况：在干净的环境中以额定或者低于额定功率使用，每天 8 小时。
严酷工况：以额定或者低于额定功率使用，每天 24 小时。或在比较肮脏和有尘埃的环境中。或电动机承受
振动或者轻冲击负荷。
恶劣工况：在非常肮脏和尘埃的环境中，或者有重冲击负荷和大的振动。
6.3 加油方法
6.3.1 打开注油嘴和排油口防尘盖，确认注油嘴干净，用手动油枪或者气压油枪接入注油嘴并且打入油脂，
直到从排油口排出新的油脂为止。
6.3.2 移开油枪，让电动机运行 10~20 分钟，确认多余的油脂已经排出，将注油嘴和排油口防尘盖盖好，加
油结束。
6.4 润滑油脂的类型
使用正确的润滑油脂。如果加入的油脂和原来的油脂不相容，将大大降低轴承的寿命，如果不能确定是什么
牌号，请联系雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司。
雷勃电气（无锡）有限公司给可注油电动机使用的轴承润滑油脂牌号是嘉德士 SRI-2（进口轴承），津脂中小

－10－
型电机轴承润滑脂 2 号（国产轴承） 。
特别注意：如果电动机在不停机的情况下加油，必须有经过训练的人员进行，并且带电部分和旋转部件有完
整的保护。
7. 电动机的储存
7.1 电动机应该储存在清洁、干燥和无腐蚀性气体的环境中。
7.2 储存地点应该避免周围环境剧烈变化。
7.3 储存时间不能太长，不宜堆得过高，以免损坏电动机。
7.4 如果电动机长期储存在潮湿的环境中，使用必须确认电动机的绝缘电阻大于 1 兆欧，如果低于 1 兆欧应
该进行烘干处理，经过烘干处理以后仍然达不到 1 兆欧，电机必须送修。
注：电动机烘干方法
方法 1：将电动机拆开，把定子绕组置于烘房内，绕线转子电动机将转子同时置于烘房内，烘房温度不超过
100℃。注意烘房内、外必须保持良好通风。一般当绝缘电阻大于 1 兆欧以及绝缘电阻停止变化，说明烘干结束。
方法 2：将电动机转子堵住，对电动机绕组加低电压，一般要求施于电动机绕组的电流约为铭牌额定电流的
1/3~1/2。注意确保电动机绕组的温度不要超过 120℃，当绝缘电阻大于 1 兆欧以及绝缘电阻停止变化，说明烘
干结束。
7.5 电动机经过长期储存，应检查轴承是否生锈，如果生锈必须更换新品。同时要补充新的润滑脂。
7.6 有加热装置的电动机在电动机储存期间必须接通加热器，防止电动机在储存期间受潮。
8. 报废电动机的处理
根据国家对环境保护的要求，电动机寿命终了以后应该根据电动机材料进行分别处理，以免在处理过程中对
环境造成影响。
电动机主要的材料是铸铁、钢铁、铜、铝和绝缘材料。
一般金属材料可以回收利用。非金属材料无法回收，可以通过燃烧等方法处理，但是必须确保燃烧过程对环

－11－

境不造成污染。
请根据国家相关法规进行处理。
9. 电动机常见故障与分析排除

序号 常见故障 原因分析 排除方法

1. 电源未接 1. 检查连接线等是否有断开。
2. 定子绕组故障 2. 检查绕组是否短路或开路。
1 不能起动 3. 负载过大或设备被卡死 3. 选择大一档电机或减轻负荷；如果传动设备卡
4. 接错线 死，消除故障。
4. 校准接线。
带负载运行转速 1. 电源电压过低。 1. 检查电动机接线柱电压。
2
低 2. 负载过大。 2. 选择大一档电机或减轻负荷。
1. 电源线和接地线搞错。 1. 纠正接线。
2. 绕组老化或受潮。 2. 绕组进行干燥处理，绝缘老化更换绕组。
3 电动机外壳有电
3. 引接线与外壳碰。 3. 检查引接线与外壳是否碰。如果碰立即加绝
缘纠正。
1. 电动机缺相运行。 1. 检查电气连接，排除缺相故障。
运转时声音不正 2. 轴承损坏和缺油。 2. 更换轴承或更换润滑油。
4 3. 定转子相擦。 3. 检查电动机定子内膛，有无漆瘤等杂物，检
常
查后处理。

－12－
 1. 电机或负载安装松动。 1. 检查并紧固底脚螺栓。
2. 联轴器或皮带轮偏心或平 2. 校准偏心或重新平衡。
5 振动异常 衡不好。
3. 轴伸撞击后弯曲。 3. 更换转子或轴。
4. 转子平衡不好。 4. 重新平衡。
1. 轴承损坏。 1. 更换轴承。
2. 轴承润滑脂充填量不当或 2. 更换润滑脂，润滑脂充填量为 1/2~2/3 之间。
润滑脂质量不好。 3. 校准联轴器或者调整皮带轮张力。
3. 联轴器不对中心或皮带轮 4. 更换已经磨损的端盖、轴或者转子。
6 轴承过热
太紧。 5. 重新装配电动机。
4. 轴承室和轴磨损引起走钢
圈。
5. 电动机装配不良。
1. 负载太大。 1. 选择大一档电机或降低负载。
2. 环境温度太高。 2. 降低环境温度或降低负载。
3. 电源电压太高或过低。 3. 检查原因，确认电压太高或过低，可以降低
7 温升高或冒烟
负载或停机。
4．电动机二相运行。 4. 检查电气连接，排除缺相故障。
5．电动机通风道堵塞。 5. 清除电动机进出风口的污垢和杂物。

－13－

3-Phase Induction Motors

Operation and Maintenance Manual
1. Warnings! Note before installation.
1.1 Confirm that the parameters in the nameplate meet your requirement.
1.2 Confirm that the motor is not damaged.
1.3 Remove the shaft holder (if the motor has) from the shaft extension, and reinstall it before
transportation once more.
1.4 Lifting eyebolts and other lifting devices must be tightened before lifting, and they are only
used for lifting the motor. If there are more than one lifting lug, they must be used together to bear the
weight.
1.5 After installation, confirm that the mounting (IM) is in line with the identification on the
nameplate. Check that the drain holes are at the lowest position. Any question, please contact Regal
Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd .
1.6 Rotate the motor shaft extension slowly to verify that the motor can have free rotation.
2. Warnings! Follow below safety precaution.
2.1 Person who’s in charge of installing, debugging, operating, maintaining, and repairing motors
must be completely trained, so that he can understand the dangerousness to human beings, and the
harmfulness to equipments. If the motor is not installed, operated and maintain correctly, it will harm
the health and life of human being.
Special safe specifications must in line with relative national rules.

－14－
 2.2 Before maintaining, must turn off all supply connected with motor and its auxiliary parts.
Confirm that the motor is already standstill.
2.3 The motor and protection devices must be grounded to prevent accidents or failures in service.
2.4 The protection devices should not be open circuit and should be used. The protection devices
can ensure the life of motor.
2.5 The motor must have proper protective device to prevent operators from getting close to the
rotating parts; Do not touch the rotating parts when the motor is running.
2.6 No contact with live parts. Under the occasions of auto-starting, auto-shutting and remote
starting, must set a sign plate to note that the motor will start at any time before turn off.
2.7 Before starting, confirm that all shaft and keys are fitted firmly.
2.8 In order to prevent overload, you’d better to install the monitor of winding temperature. Regal
Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd . can install the temperature protector of winding, its lead wires connect directly
with controller to provide the protection of automatic power off.
2.9 No phase operation in service. It is recommended to install the phase failure protection device.
2.10 Never fit a coupling or pulley by a hammer, so as not to damage the bearing.
2.11 When access to the noise source, must wear the earhood.
For more information about noise limits, please contact Regal Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd . or reference
the relevant product standard of Regal Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd .
2.12 Protection against the ingress of water.
2.13 When motor used in varied speed mechanism, confirm that it do not exceed the maximum
safety speed of motor and operate without overload. (At lower speed, the ventilation of the
totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor will decrease. The auxiliary cooling fan should be added). Any

－15－

questions, please contact Regal Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd .

2.14 Confirm safety measure to avoid accidents in brake failure.
2.15 Some motors of Regal Beloit (Wuxi) Company provide continuous operation regreasing
nipples. The machine is intended for lubrication during operation by qualified personnel, familiar with
relevant safety requirements. Internal rotating parts or live parts should be integral protected.
3. Environmental requirements and operating conditions
3.1 Normal ambient temperatures cannot exceed 40℃, and the relative humidity is less than 90%.
3.2 Maximum altitude 1000 m above sea level.
NOTE!
If there is deviation between upper environment conditions and practice, such as normal
ambient temperatures are lower than -20℃ or higher than 45℃, or the relative humidity is more
than 95%, or altitude above sea level is more than 1000 m, or high vibration occasion, Suitability
of motor for operation must be checked. Any question, please contact Regal Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd .
3.3 The deviation between supply frequency and rated frequency is no more than 2%, the deviation
between supply voltage and rated voltage is no more than 5% (except the special design according to the
agreement).
3.4 The open-drip-proof motor (IP23, IP21) is suitable for operating in clean, dry, ventilation and
no-corrosive air indoor. More detail, see GB 755.
3.5 The totally-enclosed fan-cooled motor (IP44, IP54,IP55) is suitable for operating in relative
dirty, humidity, dust environment. More detail, see GB 755.
3.6 The outdoor anticorrosive motor is suitable for operating outdoor or in corrosive air, high
humidity environment.

－16－
 Note： All operating environment cannot stop motor from normal ventilation.
If there are other ventilators, assure they do not affect the ventilation of motor. If it
is affected, must adjust the air volume of ventilator or change the ventilating path of
motor to ensure the ventilation effectively.
4. Installation and Starting
4.1 Check before Installation
4.1.1 Check all rating data of nameplate, and winding connection.
4.1.2 Measure the insulation resistance of the motor by the use of a “Megger”. If the resistance is
below 1 megohm, the stator coil must be dried out thoroughly.The drying temperature do not exceed
+120℃.
4.1.3 Check the motor for damage, distortion, loose. Rotate the rotor by hand to check no abnormal
occurrence.
4.1.4 Check whether the motor mounting mode is in line with the requirements. The basic type of
construction IM B3 can be modified as other type of construction IM V5 by additional support or
changing bearing to bear the axial force.
4.1.5 Clean dust and other thing on the motor.
4.1.6 For long period storage motor (usually over 1 year), check the lubrication and replace it if
necessary.
4.2 Installation
4.2.1 Foundation of motor should be rigid. If motor is not connected with other equipment, both
are installed on foundation made in concrete. The suitable type of construction should be chosen for
frequent remotion.

－17－

4.2.2 Any height differences between the motor and the driven machine should be adjusted. The
surface for the shims must be bigger than that for the feet. The amount of the shims is less than 3.
Note: Insufficient rigidness or improper structure of foundation will lead to abnormal
vibration and noise and even shaft fracture, further to accident when the motor is running.
4.2.3 The place should be spacious enough for daily operation, maintenance.
4.2.4 Motors can be connected by coupling joints, belt pulleys or gearings, and must insure the
radial force at motor’s shaft end to protect the motor from damages. Any questions, please contact Regal
Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd .
NOTE: The flat belts do not apply to 2P motor above 4kW and 4P motor above 30Kw for
power transmission. The length of the sheave should not be greater than the shaft extension,
otherwise can lead to shaft fracture. The fan end of the double shaft extension motor should be
connected with the coupling only.
4.2.5 When belt pulley is adopted, ensure the parallelism of the motor shaft and the bearing shaft.
And keep the vertical of the motor shaft and the belts.
When coupling is adopted, make the motor shaft and bearing shaft coincide.
NOTE: When coupling is adopted, there must be enough space between couplings of motor
and of driven machine to prevent axial force caused by heat expanding and further to lead to
bearing failure.
4.2.6 Please confirm that all mounting holes are locked by steel bolts, and nuts. At the place which
is easy to get rust, stainless steel bolts should be used, and for the high vibration situation, anti-vibration
pad must be used.
4.2.7 For the motors which have drain holes, ensure that the drain holes are at the right position.

－18－
When the drain holes are open, measure must be done to protect against the ingress of any object.
4.3 Connection
4.3.1 Connections of motors, controllers, over-load protections, and groundings must in line with
related wiring standard and safety standard.
4.3.2 Note nameplate markings and connection diagram in the terminal box. The 6 terminals are
marked with letters U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 or the 3 terminals are marked with letters U, V, W. The
6 terminals may be connected △ or Ｙaccording to the connection diagram. The 3 terminals are
connected according to A-U, B-V, C-W.

Note：Check the phase sequence from the connection diagram, the phase sequence for
clockwise rotation looking from the D-end of the motor. For counter-clockwise rotation, the phase
sequence is in accordance with ordering.

－19－

4.3.3 Connect terminals of thermal protector (P1, P2) to the motor control equipment directly.
4.3.4 Generally, there’re auxiliary terminal boxes for those motors which have heaters or PTO
bearing protective devices, please connect according to the connection diagram.
4.3.5 For the wound rotors (LSR series), motor should be connected to the resistance and the power
supply, and inset to the control device.
4.3.6 It is important to verify that the supply voltage and the frequency are the same as the values
indicated on the nameplate of the motor before starting.
4.3.7 For multi-speed motor, please connect as per the random connection diagrams. The rotation
direction at different speed should be confirmed during debugging. Any question, please contact Regal
Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd ..
4.4 Starting up
4.4.1 No-load running
4.4.1.1 Check whether the rated current of control equipment’s fuse complies with the requirement,
and whether it is safe.
4.4.1.2 Check whether the connection of starter is correct, flexible, the contact is in good condition,
and the starter has reliable earthing.
4.4.1.3 The motor can have direct-on-line starting or auto-transformer starting.
Note：There is 5-8 times starting current when direct-on-line starting, and starting torque is
direct proportion with the square of voltage when auto-transformer starting. Adopt
auto-transformer starting for under-voltage, but it must in the situation of no-load running or
light-load running. If the static load is heavy, only adopt direct-on-line starting.
4.4.1.4 Check the direction of rotation of the motor, if it is wrong, exchange the two-phase wire

－20－
randomly, then the problem will be solved.
4.4.1.5 After the above inspections, motor can have no-load test run, which will cost 1~2 hours.
During that period, observe whether there’s any abnormal phenomenon, noise or vibrations, and
whether the shaft is overheated or has oil leakage problem. Any of such problems must be solved
immediately before load running.
4.4.2 Running with load
After no-load test run, load running can be carried out.
4.4.2.1 Start up the motor with load, if the motor doesn't start immediately, or runs smoothly, shut
off the power supply and check the installation or the wirings.
4.4.2.2 Coupling misalignment, fixed bolts loose, poor foundation stiffness or vibration transferred
from other machines all may lead to motor abnormal vibration, which will cause damages to the motor.
4.4.2.3 Low voltage, over-load for rotors and uncompleted electric connections or combination of
such problems may lead to abnormal noise, which will also cause damages to the motor.
4.4.2.4 When the motor is running, make sure the current is identical to the ratings shown on the
nameplate. Keep current balance of 3-phase windings. The same for wound rotor motor (LSR series).
4.4.2.5 According to the technical specs, starting times should be controlled. Cold start must be not
more than 3~5 times. If the motor have run for a long time or is under heat condition, should not restart
it immediately after a shut-off, and cannot restart continuously, otherwise, the motor will get damaged.
4.4.2.6 If one transformer is shared by several motors, and its capacity is not large enough, then,
start motors in the order of large motor to small motor.
5. Inspection and Maintenance
In time inspection and maintenance are needed to find out hidden dangers and to prevent failures

－21－

for safe and reliable motors.

Please check and maintain the motors as per below principles.
5.1 Routine inspections during the running.
NOTE：Any sudden increasing noise and vibration happens, shut off the machine and
inspect it immediately.
Do periodic inspection during the continuous running, at least once a day.
5.1.1 Motors should keep clean to prevent oil, water or other dirt from entering the motor.
5.1.2 Keep good ventilation to the motor, the air inlet and outlet should be unobstructed, and
meshes should be cleaned frequently.
5.1.3 When the motor is running, keep monitoring. Any abnormal phenomena happen, shut off the
machine immediately, inspect to clear the failures.
5.2 Shutdown Inspection
Any following abnormal conditions occur, should shut down immediately to check.
5.2.1 Heavy vibration,
5.2.2 The driven machine damaged
5.2.3 Bearing wear or overheat
5.2.4 Bearing misalignment, axial vibration
5.2.5 Speed descend suddenly
5.2.6 Friction between stator and rotor, enclosure overheat
5.2.7Motor or starting equipment breathing air fumes
5.2.8 Personnel accident
5.3 Regular inspection

－22－
 According to service conditions, regular check should be taken to motors.
5.3.1 Check whether the fixed screws are loose or rusted, which will affect the fixing performance.
5.3.2 Check whether the electric connection is fastened, and whether is rusted which will affect the
performance.
5.3.3 Check whether the electric connection for the slip ring of wounded rotor (LRS series) motor
is fastened, and whether the slip ring and brush is wore out.
5.3.4 Check whether the earthing is fastened, and whether is rusted which will affect the earthing
performance.
5.3.5 Check whether the shaft seal is aged, if it is aged or wore out, change it. You can contact
Regal Beloit(Wuxi)Co.,Ltd . for any detailed spec.
5.3.6 Check the coupling is fastened, and ensure the concentricity.
5.3.7 Check whether there’s liquid that will affect motor performance inside the motor, if there is,
discharge it.
5.3.8 Check the bearing, if it is worn out, change it immediately.
5.3.9 Check paint on the motor, if needed, re-paint the motor to prevent over-rusted.
5.4 Motor Maintenance
Motors should have periodic maintenance, and the failures should be disposed immediately.
Generally, a rough maintenance per month, and an overall maintenance per year is needed.
5.4.1 Rough maintenance includes:
5.4.1.1 Clear the dust on the motor surface;
5.4.1.2 Measure motor’s insulation resistance;
5.4.1.3 Fasten the fixed bolts, earth studs, and other connecting bolts;

－23－

5.4.1.4 Clear up the starting devices and insulation terminals;

5.4.1.5 Clear up the dust and carbons on the slip ring and brush for wounded rotor (LSR series)
motor.
5.4.1.6 Clear up the meshes on the fan cover to ensure the air inlet and outlet are not jammed.
5.4.2 Overall maintenance includes:
5.4.2.1 All the items included in rough maintenance;
5.4.2.2 Clear up inside of the motor to keep the stator winding clean, with no greasy dirt, and no
exposed copper.
5.4.2.3 Change the shaft if it is damaged. In the normal service environment, suggest changing the
shaft once a year (runtime is approx. 8000 hours every year).
5.4.2.4 If there’s no need to change the shaft, should clean the shaft and change the grease.
5.4.2.5 Clean or change other parts of motor.
6. Lubrication
Correct lubrication will directly affect the lifetime of the bearings and motors. So it’s important to
grease the bearings correctly and regularly.
6.1 Bearings of ZZ types are usually permanently greased for the smaller machines. Such are
pre-greasing bearings, and no need to re-grease.
6.2 The re-greasing device is designed for the large motors (above H280) and specific motors. It is
still necessary to change the lubrication at regular intervals, though the motors have been greased when
leave factory. The exact period depends on the motor size and the service condition.
The recommended lubrication intervals are as follow.（Over-greasing and frequent-greasing can
also cause damage to motor.）

－24－
 Rated Power Speed The recommended lubrication intervals
（KW） （rpm） Normal condition Severity condition Bad condition
＜18.5 1500 5 Years 3 Years 1Year
18.5~90 1500 1Year 6 Months 3 Months
90~200 1500 3 Months 3 Months 1Month
200~630 1500 3 Months 1Month 15 Days
＜18.5 3000 5Years 3Years 1Year
18.5~90 3000 1Year 6 Months 3 Months
90~200 3000 3 Months 1 Month 1Month
200~630 3000 3 Months 1 Month 15 Days

NOTE：
Normal condition refers to the motor operate at rated power or below in clean environment.
Duty cycle is no more than 8h per day.
Severity condition refers to the motor operate at rated power or below in dust environment
with the lighter shock load and vibration. Duty cycle is 24h per day.
Bad condition refers to the motor operate in very dirty environment with heavy shock load
and vibration.

－25－

6.3 Re-greasing method

6.3.1 Before re-greasing, open the dust seals at lubricator fittings and oil discharge outlets to assure
the lubricator fittings are clean. Use a grease gun to pump grease until fresh grease vent out.
6.3.2 After re-greasing, operate the motor for 10-20 minutes to allow any excess grease to vent out.
Close the grease inlet and outlet plug if fitted.
6.4 Types of grease
Grease with the correct properties is available from all major lubricant manufacturers. If the make
of grease is changed and compatibility is uncertain, consult the Regal Beloit (Wuxi) Company.
Galtex SRI-2 grease is used for the motors with import shafts, and No2 grease is used for medium
and small-sized motors with domestic shafts.
NOTE: If relubrication is to be performed by the authorized personnel when the motor is
running, rotating parts and live parts must be protected.
7. Motor Storage
7.1 The motor should always be stored in clean, dry, and corrosive free conditions.
7.2 The storage place should not be located in the uncertainty environment.
7.3 Storage period is not too long and storage pile is not too high to damage motors.
7.4 If the motor is stored in a humid environment, measure insulation resistance before starting.
Resistance shall exceed the 1M ohm. If the 1M ohm resistance value is not attained, the winding is too
damp and must be oven dried. After oven dried, the 1M ohm resistance value is still not attained, the
motor must be repaired.
Note: Oven dried method:

－26－
 Method 1：Dismantle motor and put the stator winding into the oven. For the wound-rotor motor,
rotor should be put into the oven at the same time. Oven temperature should be less than 100℃. Keep
good ventilation inside and outside oven. When insulation resistance exceeds the 1M ohm or insulation
resistance value gets steady, oven dried is over.
Method 2：Stall the rotor and apply lower voltage to winding, ensure that the applied current is 1/3
to 1/2 of rated current. Winding temperature should be less than 120℃. When insulation resistance
exceeds the 1M ohm or insulation resistance value gets steady, oven dried is over.
7.5 Check rust on the bearings after long period storage, if has, replace with new shaft, and add
fresh grease.
7.6 If the motor is equipped with space heater, the space heater must be switched on to prevent
motor from dampness.
8. Handling for discarded motor
According to the national environment protection requirements, when the motor is at the end of its
service life, it should be disposed separately as per its materials, so as to avoid environment pollution.
The material content used in the manufacturing of the motor is as follows: cast iron, steel, copper,
aluminium, insulation materials.
General metal materials can be recycled. The nonmetal should be either incinerated, but attention
should be paid to ensure that such process will not adversely affect environment.
Please dispose the motors in line with the national regulations.
9. Common Failures and Troubleshooting

－27－

No TROUBLE CAUSE WHAT TO DO

1. Power-off 1. Check wiring.
2. Stator winding failure 2. Check windings short circuit or broken.
Motor fails to
1 3. Motor may be overloaded 3. Choose a larger motor or reduce load.
start
4. Wrong wiring clear the fault of driving equipments
4. Check lead.
low speed with 1. Voltage is too low. 1. Check voltage for motor’s terminals.
2
load 2. Over loaded. 2. Choose a larger motor or reduce load.
1. Confusing the wiring of 1. Correct the wiring.
power line and earthing. 2. Drying or replace winding.
Electricized
3 2. Insulation moistered or aged. 3. Check lead and enclosure and insulate
enclosure
3. Connection between lead and them.
enclosure.
1. Motor runs with no phase. 1. Check electric connection to clear the
Abnormal noise 2. Bearing is damaged or lack failure of no phase.
4 in of oil. 2. Change bearing or grease.
running 3. Stator and rotor rub. 3. Check the stator bore, clean the
sundries if there is.

Vibration 1. Motor or loaded installation 1. Check and fasten the foot bolts.
5 abnormal is loose. 2. Align central points or rebalance.

－28－
 2. Coupling or belt pulley is off
center or is unbalanced.
5 3. The shaft extension gets bent
after being hit.
4. Unbalanced rotor.
1. Damaged bearing.
2. Poor lubrication.
3. Misalignment between motor
Bearing
6 and driven machine shafts.
overheating
4. Friction between bearing and
bearing house or shaft.
5. Improper assembly.
1. Over loaded.
2. Ambient temperature is too
high.
3. Supply voltage is too high or
High
too low.
7 temperature
4. Motor runs with 2 phase.
rising or faming
5. Airways are blocked.
－29－
－30－
3. Change rotor or shaft
4. Rebalance
1. Replace the damaged bearing.
2. Changing grease, and the grease takes
up 1/2~2/3.
3. Adjust belt tension or align couplings.
4. Replace the damaged end-shield, shaft
or rotor.
5. Re-assembly motor.
1. Choose a larger motor or reduce the
load.
2. Lower the ambient temperature or
reduce the load.
3. Confirm the reason, and reduce the
load or shut off the machine.
4. Check the electric connection, and
clear the failure of lacking of phase.
5. Clean the sundries at the inlet and
outlet.
6.2 Pressure gauge 压力表
*Origin 产地：China 中国
*Manufacturer 制造商： Shanghai Automation Instrumention CO., Ltd.
上海自动化仪表厂
*Model 型号： Y-100B
 英文说明书

SERIOUS Y-B STAINLESS STELL

PRESSURE GAUGE
FEATURES
All stainless stellconstruction
High accuracy ＆durability
Superior corrosion resistance
Available oil filled for vibraion
damping ＆ extended life
Stem ＆panel mount
APPLICATIONS
Chemical ＆ petrochemical plants
Industrial machinery
Pumps ＆ compressors
HVAC systems
Power plants ＆ steam boilers
High virbrations, pulsation ＆ shock
environment
SPECIFICATIONS
Measuring Range ＆ Accuracy
Measuring Ranges
MODEL accuracy Case: Polished 304 Stainless stell
(MPa) (Hg~Psi)
Bourdon Tube: 316 Stainless stell
Y-60B-F
0~0.6、1、1.6、2.5、4、6 Connection: 316 Stainless stell 1/8’’NPT
Y-60B-FZ
10、16、25、40、60 2.5 for 60mm gauge ＆ 1/4’’NPT or 1/2’’NPT
Y-63B-F
-0.1~0.5、0.9、1.5、2.4 for 100mm ＆ 150mm gauges
Y-63B-FZ
Movement Parts: 304 Stainless stell
0~0.1、
0.16、
0.25、
0.4、
0.6、
1、
Dial: Aluminum
Y-100B-F 1.6
Dial Arc: 270O
Y-100B-FZ 2.5、4、6、10、16、25、40、60
Pointer: Aluminum
Y-150B-F -0.1~0、0.06、0.15、0.3
1 Window: Dual glass
Y-150B-FZ 0.5、0.9、1.5、2.4
Oil Fill: Glycerin or silicone
Y-103B-F (-30″~0、15、30、60、100、
1.5 Operating Temperatures:
Y-103B-FZ 150;0~150、
30、
60、
100、
200、
-40 ~ 70 ℃ (No oil-filled in the enclosure)
Y-153B-F 300、400、600、800、1000、
-25 ~ 70 ℃ (Oil-filled in the enclosure)
Y-153B-FZ 1500、
2000、
3000、
4000、
6000、
10000)
DIMENSIONS
Unit: Length in mm(inch)
D d0 d1 H1 H2 L L1 L2
60 72 4.5 <60 <18 14 30 55
2.36 2.83 0.18 0.71 0.71 0.55 1.18 2.17
100 116 4.8 <35 <35 20 50 98
3.94 4.57 0.19 1.38 1.38 0.79 1.97 3.86
150 165 5.8 <125 <60 20 50 98
5.91 6.5 0.23 4.92 2.36 0.79 1.97 3.86

Lower Mounter Pancl Mount

TO ORDER

Please specify the model, name, accuracy, mount, size of connection screw,
measuring range＆whether or not with oil-filled.
6.3 Pressure switch 压力开关

*Origin 产地：USA 美国
*Manufacturer 制造商： UE
*Model 型号：H100-218-1519-M201
6.4 Solenoid valve 电磁阀

*Origin 产地：Japan 日本
*Manufacturer 制造商： SMC
*Model 型号：VXD262
6.5 Centrifugal 离心泵

*Origin 产地：China 中国
*Manufacturer 制造商： Glundfos 格兰富
*Model 型号：CM25
grundfos INSTRUCTIONS

CM
 1

2 3
 22 3

10 mm

x4

4 5
 4 5

90° x4

6 7
 6A 6B
1~ 3~

8 9
 7 8 9

10 mm

10 11
 10

12 13
 11A 11B
1~ OFF 3~ OFF

ON ON

14 15
 WebCAP /
S

grundfos.com/CM-manual

16 17
18 19
 ECM: 1122134

Tel: +45 87 50 14 00
95121198 1013

www.grundfos.com
DK-8850 Bjerringbro
Poul Due Jensens Vej 7
Grundfos Holding A/S

The name Grundfos, the Grundfos logo, and be think innovate

are registered trademarks owned by Grundfos Holding A/S
or Grundfos A/S, Denmark. All rights reserved worldwide.
 7 Drawings, Lists, Diagrams, etc
图纸，清册，图表

7.1 General arrangement drawing… 总装图

7.2 P&ID drawing…… 流程图
7.3 Foundation drawing……基础图
7.4 Terminal wiring diagram……接线端子图
7.5 Logic drawing…… 运行逻辑图
7.6 DCS IO list……DCS IO 清单
7.7 Instrument list…… 仪表清单
 Samra Phase IV Add‐On Combined 
Cycle Project
DCS/PLC Input/Output List

Digital Analog Signal Signal Purpose

Signal Input Input Input
Rev P&ID Controller Tag Number Full Description DCS/PLC Description Output Range- Range- Range Power Signal Contents Notes
Type Range- Range- Range IND CNT INT ANN TRIP SOE
Type Start End Units Source Range
Start End Units
Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43CP001-XG02 VACCUM PUMP C INLET PRESSURE LOW VAC PMP C INL PRESS LOW DI -1 0 BAR Y Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43CL001-XG02 VACCUM PUMP C SEPARATOR LEVEL High VAC PMP C SEP LVL NORMAL DI Y Y
Y
Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43CL001-XG01 VACCUM PUMP C SEPARATOR LEVEL LOW VAC PMP C SEP LVL LOW DI Y Y Y
Y
Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA101-XB01 VACCUM PUMP C INLET VALVE OPENED VAC PMP C INLT VLV OPD DI Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA101-XB02 VACCUM PUMP C INLET VALVE CLOSED VAC PMP C INLT VLV CLSD DI Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA101-XB03 VACCUM PUMP C INLET VALVE FAULT VAC PMP C INLT VLV FAL DI Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA101-XB04 VACCUM PUMP C INLET VALVE REMOTE VAC PMP C INLT VLV RMO DI Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA101-XB91 VACCUM PUMP C INLET VALVE OPEN COMMAND VAC PMP C INLT VLV OP CMD DO Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA101-XB92 VACCUM PUMP C INLET VALVE CLOSE COMMAND VAC PMP C INLT VLV CL CMD DO Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA102-XB91 VACCUM PUMP C MAKE-UP VALVE1 OPEN COMMAND VAC PMP MK-UP VLV 1 OP CMD DO 24VDC Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AA103-XB91 VACCUM PUMP C MAKE-UP VALVE2 OPEN COMMAND VAC PMP MK-UP VLV 2 OP CMD DO 24VDC Y

Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AP001_XQ50 VACCUM PUMP C MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE U VAC PMP C MOT WDG TEMP U PTC 150 °C Y
MCC
Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AP001_XQ51 VACCUM PUMP C MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE V VAC PMP C MOT WDG TEMP V PTC 150 °C Y
MCC
Rev.C G320012 TURBINE 40MAJ43AP001_XQ52 VACCUM PUMP C MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE W VAC PMP C MOT WDG TEMP W PTC 150 °C Y
MCC

400 DCS PLC IO List_Rev.C.xlsx  2BE1 400 1 of 1 Rev.G/Issued 2017.06.21

 EQUIPMENT: VENDOR: DOCUMENT NUMBER: JO003-10-MAG-Y-SPX-098
PROJECT:
Samra Phase IV Add-On Combined
Hogging Vacuum Pump INSTRUMENT LIST Cycle Project
REV.G DATE:2017.06.21

P&ID LINE INSTRUMENT ISA RANGE REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION

MANUFAC. MODEL REMARKS
ID REV. TAG SERVICE
PROCESS PNEUMATIC WIRING
NUMBER REV. EQUIPMENT TYPE CODE LOWER UPPER UNITS DATA SHEET TECH. SPECIFIC. LAY-OUT
HOOK UP HOOK UP DIAGRAMS

H. VACUUM SYSTEM

Single switch with internal

H100-218-1519-
1 40MAJ43CP001 VAC PMP C INL PRESS LOW G320014 B Pressure Switch -1 0 Bar(g) adjustment,single UE
M201
conduits,IP65,±1.0％.24VDC/3A
L=500mm/ANSI B16.5 3/4" 150#,RF BM26/P/C
2 40MAJ43CL001 VAC PUM C SEP LVL IND G320014 B Level Indicator 0 500 mm KROHNE
Flange;SS304,IP67,IP65,±10mm 3/4"/150lb

3 40MAJ43CL001 VAC PMP C SEP LVL LOW G320014 B Level Switch N/A N/A N/A 24VDC/5A, IP65,SPDT. ±10mm KROHNE MS15/MC,SPDT

4 40MAJ43CL001 VAC PMP C SEP LVL HIGH G320014 B Level Switch N/A N/A N/A 24VDC/5A, IP65,SPDT. ±10mm KROHNE MS15/MC,SPDT

1/2"NPT(M),316SS,Diameter Y-100B-FZ,-1-
6 40MAJ43CP501 VAC PMP C INL PRESS G320014 B Pressure Gauge -1 0 Bar(g) SAIC
100mm,IP65,±1.0％ 0Bar

1/2"NPT(M),316SS,Diameter
7 40MAJ43CP502 VAC PMP C MAKE UP PRESS G320014 B Pressure Gauge 0 0.6 MPa(g) BRIGHTY YTNF-100H
100mm,IP65,±1.0％

2BE1 400 Page 1 of 1